OS/2 Shareware BBS: 10 Tools/10-Tools.zip/GPF.ZIP/HELP/GPFEDT.HLP

OS/2 Help File | 1991-04-02 | 236KB | 10,306 lines

ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. Gpf - Gui Programming Facility ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Gpf Extended Help:

 o Press here for Introduction.
 o Press here for Help on Keys.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.1. Introduction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

INTRODUCTION

Scope of This Product

Gpf is the most comprehensive tool available today for the creation and
integration of a Presentation Manager Graphic User Interface into your
application. With the common exception of naming your objects and screens, the
bulk of the work is done with the point-and-click method; screens are presented
to you in a logical fashion for a complete interface definition.

The definition (stored in a .ORC file) is reentrant, so you can incrementally
modify or improve your GUI as often as you like. All secondary files can always
be re-generated from this one file, and it is the only GUI file you need to
maintain during your development cycle.

Gpf Features

Common PM objects

Gpf allows you to define any and all objects known to PM, with a variety of
different parameters which modify the behavior or appearance of the object
being constructed. There is no practical limit to the number of
windows\controls you can create.

 o Windows and Dialog Boxes
 o Message boxes, with several standard icons, warning beeps, and response
   modes
 o List boxes, combo boxes
 o All button and checkbox types
 o Vertical and horizontal scroll bars
 o Menu bars with unlimited hierarchies for each entry
 o System menu button, maximize/minimize buttons
 o Static text fields, with numerous variants
 o Entry and MLE fields
 o Several border types

 In addition to these standard objects, all of which can be created in seconds,
 Gpf has installed many additional aids.

 Generating HELP Screens

 The creation of a complete HELP system for your application is so easy with
 Gpf that it would be a shame not to enhance your product with this facility.
 By default, Gpf installs the system HELP menu recommended by CUA into your
 entry screen. Creating a help panel for any screen or control is no more than
 a click of a button away from the object being defined. Press this button and
 you can easily

 o type in, install an import statement, or drop in via the clipboard the
   relevant text for the object
 o designate a CONTENT title, which will be incorporated into the complete HELP
   system
 o similarly designate an INDEX title
 o create a small, one-line help or prompt which will be visible on your
   application screen, and will dynamically change as the cursor traverses an
   object so defined.

 The text installed into the main panel can include any and all macros known to
 IPFC; so bitmaps can be included, lists generated, text can be highlighted,
 cross references are possible, and so on.

 Presentation Parameters

 Gpf allows you to easily specify a set of visual properties (border colors,
 text color foreground/background, highlighting, etc). Such a set (create as
 many as you want) are all stored, under  a name of your choice, and can be
 recalled and applied at any time, to any number of compatible objects.

 The creation and use of the Presentation Objects is similar to the use of TAGS
 in a Desktop Publishing package. Most objects, during initial definition, will
 present you with a list of all defined Presentation Objects.  Point-and-click,
 then inspect the results and repeat until the desired effect is achieved. What
 could be simpler? Expand the list at any time, of course.

 SQL Support

 Gpf can read in, log, and decompose any DBM databases located on your system
 if you signal your intention to create an SQL application. Several of the PM
 objects, notably List/Combo boxes, can be defined to automatically load and
 display the contents of that database, down to the field level. Items are
 selectable for further processing by your application.

 Other Features

 Once you define all your screens and controls Gpf provides facilities for
 logical linkage, again through a point-and-click mechanism. This procedure,
 called Defining an Action, is very easy to use. Besides pre-defining most of
 the common control and window messages, selectable in a set of two or three
 FROM-TO lists, you can install code or calls to your code via this mechanism.

 Gpf can include bitmaps and icons, as user defined buttons or in menus.

 Gpf completely automates the compile/link steps. If done properly, you need
 never leave Gpf while completing your interface, in fact while completing your
 entire application.  All necessary files are created for you, and all
 necessary utilities (including the Resource compiler, IPFC, etc) are invoked
 when required.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2. Keys Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The frequent user can use the following key combinations to access GPF
functions directly:

Note:  Click on the menu name to see the accelerator keys for items within that
       menu.

 Menu Name           Key
 File Menu           ALT+F
 Create Menu         ALT+C
 Object Menu         ALT+B
 Options Menu        ALT+O
 Toolkit Menu        ALT+T
 Help Menu           ALT+H
 Window Menu         ALT+W


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2.1. File Menu Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Function            Key
 New                 CTRL+N
 Open                CTRL+O
 Properties
 Save                CTRL+S
 Save As             CTRL+A
 Exit                F3 (CUA)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2.2. Create Menu Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Function            Key
 Window\Dialog       CTRL+W
 Menu                CTRL+M
 Text Static         CTRL+T
 Button              CTRL+B
 ListBox             CTRL+L
 ComboBox            CTRL+C
 Entry Field         CTRL+E
 Multiple LE         CTRL+U
 Vert Scroll Bar     CTRL+V
 Horz Scroll Bar     CTRL+H


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2.3. Object Menu Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Function            Key
 MessageBox          CTRL+X
 Presentation        CTRL+P
 Icon                CTRL+I
 User Function       --none--
 Find PM             CTRL+F


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2.4. Options Menu Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Function            Key
 Grid                CTRL+G
 View Grid           --none--
 View Tracking       CTRL+K
 Group Move          --none--
 Bypass CUA          CTRL+Y
 Statistics          --none--
 Clean Desktop       CTRL+D


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2.5. Toolkit Menu Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Function            Key
 Animator            CTRL+R
 Generator           --none--
 Compiler            --none--
 Test                --none--


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1.2.6. Help Menu Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Function            Key
 Help for Help       SHIFT+F10 (CUA)
 Extended Help       F2 (CUA)
 Keys Help           F9 (CUA)
 Help Index          F11 (CUA)
 Help Contents       SHIFT+F2 (CUA)
 About               --none--


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. MainWindow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Gpf Interface

The Gpf interface is based on two (2) major components: the Menu Bar of Gpf
pull-downs, and Pop-up Dialog Windows. Each of the components is described
below.

Pull-downs

When you select one of the Gpf menu bar commands, the actions available for
that selected command are displayed in a 'pull-down' list. The pull-downs
provide actions that can be chosen by dragging the pointer to the desired
action and releasing a mouse button. Each action can also be chosen by using
the ALT+l command, where l is the letter in the action command that is
underlined.

Check Marks

A check mark preceding a pull-down action indicates the action is active for
the currently selected window, object, or option.

Greyed Actions

A greyed action on a pull-down indicates the action is currently unavailable.

Pop-up Dialog Windows

When you choose a pull-down action that is followed by an ellipses (...), a
pop-up dialog window is invoked. Pop-up dialog windows prompt you to specify
various settings and conditions, or choose from a list of options. You respond
to a pop-up dialog window by typing in a text entry or clicking the appropriate
pushbutton, list box, combination box, or bar.

Common Gpf Dialog Windows

The Entry Extended Help Dialog Window

The Entry Extended Help dialog window is available when defining either a
window, menu pull-down list, dialog box, message box, or individual control
that will be visible in your final application. With Extended Entry Help you
can define the text that you want displayed if the user presses F1. There is
also an optional Informational Message for providing terse, one line text. This
message will be displayed at the bottom of the application client window
whenever the user passes the mouse over a particular item, or selects the item
with the cursor keys.

A detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window can be found in
the Common Gpf Dialog Window section in this reference.

The Gpf Menu Bar

The Gpf menu bar appears above the Gpf client window area and contains the
names of the seven (7) Gpf pull-downs.

File Pull-down

The File pull-down actions create, open, save, and set the properties of Gpf
definition files. The Exit action, used to exit Gpf, is also found in this
pull-down. For a detailed explanation of the actions that are available in the
File pull-down, refer to The File Pull-Down Actions.

Create Pull-down

The Create pull-down actions provide a list of Presentation Manager control
windows ( i.e.. Buttons, Scroll Bars, etc ) that you can select from when
creating your Gpf definition. For a detailed explanation of the actions and
control windows that are available in the Create pull-down, refer to The Create
Pull-down Actions.

Objects Pull-down

The Objects pull-down actions provide a list of Presentation Manager object
types ( i.e.. Icons, Bitmaps, Fonts, Message Boxes ) that you can incorporate
into your Gpf definition. Explanations for the actions and available objects
can be found in The Objects Pull-down Actions.

Options Pull-down

The Options pull-down actions allow you to modify the general appearance and
operations of your Gpf edit session. For a detailed explanation of the actions
that are available in the Options pull-down, refer to the Options Pull-down
Actions.

Window Pull-down

The Window pull-down action allows you to selectively choose which application
windows or dialog windows are visible on the screen.

Toolkit Pull-down

The Toolkit pull-down actions allow you to test, generate, or compile the
current Gpf definition. Please refer to The Toolkit Pull-down Actions, for a
detailed explanation of the available actions.

Help Pull-down

The Help pull-down provides entry into the apllication specific help system
and, through it, into the general PM help system and services.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. ActionBar File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Pull-Down

The first pull-down on the Gpf menu bar is the File pull- down. The pull-down
actions create, open, modify, or save Gpf definitions. In addition the Exit
pull-down will allow you to exit the current Gpf session.

As with other Gpf pull-down actions, you can either select the action with a
mouse click, or by using the  (ALT+X,Y) keyboard combination, where X is the
underlined letter of the menu bar identifier and Y is the underlined letter of
the pull-down action that you wish to execute. Each of the File pull-down
actions will be described in general, and will then be covered in detail in the
order in which they appear on the pull-down.

PULL-DOWN  : review

File New (ALT+F,N)

The first action available on the File pull-down is the New action. When you
choose File New, Gpf creates a new application definition for you to work with.

File Open (ALT+F,O)

The next action for the File pull-down is the Open action. File Open allows you
to open an existing Gpf application definition.

File Properties (ALT+F,P)

The File Properties action allows you to create or modify general
characteristics of the current Gpf definition.  The Program Property dialog box
invoked is the same as the second dialog window you encounter from either the
File New action or the File Open action.

File Save (ALT+F,S)

After you have modified or created a definition, the File Save action will
allow you to save your results to a Gpf definition file.

File Save As (ALT+F,A)

The File Save As action enables you to change the name of the file where you
will save your current Gpf definition.  This action is helpful when you want to
preserve the contents of the original Gpf definition.

File Exit (ALT+F,X)

When you want to exit your current Gpf session, the File Exit action will allow
you to do so. If there are any open Gpf definitions at the time, Gpf will
prompt you whether or not to save the current file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1.1. PullDown New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File New Pull-down Action

When you select the File New (ALT+F,N) action, you are indicating to Gpf that
you want to create a new Gpf definition.

Gpf definitions is where Gpf saves all the controls and windows that you create
for your application within the editing session. It is from this definition
file that Gpf generates the C language source code and supporting files for
compilation. The definition files are in a binary format, and are readable only
by the Gpf system utilities.

If you do not have a definition loaded in the current editing session, Gpf will
automatically display the Create New Application dialog window as shown in
Figure 3-1. Otherwise Gpf will query you to save the definition before
continuing.  If you have made changes to the definition and have not saved
them, it is a good idea to save it now because your changes will be lost if you
reply NO to the "Save the current file?" option.

You are now ready to create a new application definition.

Creating a new application definition is a two step process:

           1. Name the definition and identify what drive/directory to record
           it in

           2. Specify the program properties of the new definition.

 Naming the New Application Definition File

 The New Application dialog window will allow you to define the name of the new
 definition file as well as identifying which drive and directory to store it
 in. Each of the controls in the File New Dialog Window will be explained
 below:

 File Name

 When the dialog windows appears, specify the name that you want to save the
 Gpf definition to in this entry field.

 When naming a definition, follow these guidelines:

           The file name can be no longer than eight characters long. Gpf will
           automatically add an identifying three- character extension unless
           you add one yourself. Gpf's default extension is '.ORC'.

           If desired, you can add other extensions by typing a period, and
           then the extension-for example, FIRSTONE.TST. Files with extensions
           other than .ORC don't appear in the Files box in the File Open
           dialog window. You must explicitly state the extension that you
           added during future sessions when you open a file using a non-ORC
           extension.

           You can use any characters in a filename except spaces and the
           following characters:

           * ? . , ; [ ] +  =  \ : |

 Directory is :

 This is a read-only field which informs you where the file named above will be
 stored. You can change the directory from the Directories list box, and change
 the drive using the icons at the top of the window.

 If you decide to save the definition on a different drive or directory,
 remember where you placed it for later retrieval.

 OK             Once you have filled in the File Name field and have chosen the
                drive and directory where you will place the new definition,
                you can signal Gpf that you are ready to begin by selecting the
                OK (ALT+O) button. Another way to signal Gpf to begin is by
                pressing the ENTER key.

           Gpf will append the .ORC extension to the name that you have
           specified in the File Name entry field if you have not specified
           your own extension. A  search for the filename specified is then
           conducted to insure that the new file name is indeed unique. If Gpf
           finds another file of the name specified in the working directory
           you will be presented with an error message.  You are then given the
           option to overwrite the existing file.  If you do not want to
           destroy an existing file, you can cancel the overwrite and use a
           different name in the File Name entry field.

 CANCEL         If you wish to cancel the operation at anytime during the
                naming of the New Gpf definition, click on the CANCEL button in
                the dialog window. This will signal Gpf that you do not want to
                continue and you will be returned to the Gpf session window.
                Another way to signal Gpf that you want to cancel the current
                operation is by pressing the ESC key.
 HELP           Clicking on the HELP button will invoke the Presentation
                Manager Help Facility. The Help window will provide you with
                information on options available for creating a New Application
                definition.

 New Application Program Properties

 Once you have given your new application definition a valid file name and have
 elected to continue creating the definition, Gpf will display the Program
 Property dialog window as shown in Figure 3-2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1.2. PullDown Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Open Pull-down Action

The next pull-down action on the File menu is the Open action.

When you choose the File Open (ALT+F,O) action, you are indicating to Gpf that
you want to open an existing application definition file.  Gpf definitions are
where Gpf saves all the controls and windows that you create for your
application. By default Gpf files have the following syntax:

filename.ORC

where filename is the eight character name that you originally assigned to the
file when it was created.

If you have a Gpf definition loaded in the current editing session, you will be
prompted to save the definition before continuing. If you have made changes to
the definition, and have not saved them, it is a good idea to save it now
because they will be lost if you reply no to the save option.

Gpf will then display the File Open dialog window, as shown in Figure 3-3. If
you did not have a Gpf definition loaded, this dialog window would have
appeared automatically.

The File Open dialog window will allow you to enter the name of the target Gpf
definition, as well as providing controls for locating other directories where
the file may be located. Each of the controls in this dialog window will be
discussed.

Directory Is

This is an informational, read only, display of the current working directory.
If you change the target drive and directory with the Directories list box,
this field will reflect the new target.

File Name

This entry field is where you can enter the name of the Gpf definition file you
want to open. This field can be filled a number of ways; either by keying in
the filename explicitly, or by making a selection from the FILES list box with
the mouse. If you choose the latter, Gpf will automatically fill the File Name
entry field with your list selection.

By default Gpf will search for all files in the current working directory that
have the following form:

*.ORC

where the '*' is the OS/2 wildcard character which means 'find all files with
the ORC extension that can contain any characters before the extension'.

Files

This list box contains all the files that Gpf has found using the file name
default pattern described above. You can use wild cards for searching file
names with extensions other than the Gpf default by entering the pattern in the
File Name field and pressing the ENTER key. The Files list box will display all
the files that it finds that match the File Name pattern.

You can select a filename from this list box by double clicking your selection.
To use the keyboard in this list box, first use the TAB key to highlight the
filename at the top of the list, and then use the UP and DOWN cursor keys to
highlight different entries. Pressing the ENTER key will automatically load the
selected entry in the Files list box.

Directories

If the file you want to open is not available in the current directory you can
select a different drive or directory from the Directories list box.

For example, if you want to load a file that has been stored to a floppy disk
using drive A:, click on the drive identifier [A:] and Gpf will automatically
search the drive with the pattern or explicit filename listed in the File Name
field.

 OK             By clicking on the OK button (ALT+O) you will signal Gpf that
                you are ready to load the current file that is listed in the
                File Name field. Gpf will check the drive and directory for
                that file's existence.  If the file does not exist, Gpf will
                notify you with a 'Requested File Not Found' message, otherwise
                the file will be loaded.  Another way to signal Gpf to load the
                file is by pressing the ENTER key.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button will signal to Gpf that you want
                to abort  the File Load operation and ignore the settings in
                the File Open dialog window.  Another way to signal Gpf that
                you want to cancel the current operation is by pressing the ESC
                key.

           Note that if you had saved and closed a Gpf definition when you
           invoked the File Open dialog window, that definition is still
           closed.  When you abort the File Open operation, Gpf will not have
           any definitions loaded at all.

 HELP           Clicking on the HELP button will invoke the Presentation
                Manager Help Facility. The Help window will provide you with
                information for options available when opening a Gpf definition
                file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1.3. PullDown Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Properties Pull-down Action

At any time during your Gpf edit session you can modify the Program Properties
as described in the File New Pull-down Action section.

When you choose File Properties (ALT+F,P), Gpf displays the Program Properties
dialog window as shown in Figure 3-4. From this dialog window you can modify
the name of the main source code file that will be generated by Gpf, the
version or revision number of the definition, copyright information,
Presentation Manager task list entry, the target programming language, what SQL
databases are to be used by the new application, as well as text to display for
the application help windows.

Main Source Name

In this field specify the name of the source code file, and all supporting
files needed for compilation, that will be generated by Gpf when you are ready
to compile a Gpf defined application. The name entered here does not have to be
the same as the name specified as the Gpf definition file, but the naming
convention guidelines are the same.

Actually Gpf will limit you to entering a maximum of eight characters without
an extension. Gpf will automatically generate the extension based on the target
language used and whether or not SQL data bases will be accessed.

Examples of Gpf generated source code files:

 FIRSTONE.C     C   Source code generated by Gpf
 FIRSTONE.SQC   SQL embedded C source code generated by Gpf

 Level

 Gpf allows you to track the number of revisions you may make to the
 application definition through the Level field. For example, if you have made
 minor modifications you may want to change the Level number from 1.0 to 1.1.
 You can enter any combination of letters, numbers, or punctuation marks.

 The maximum length for the Level field is four (4) characters.

 Copyright

 The copyright field can be used to enter the name of the person or company
 that will hold the copyright of the application being generated. The text that
 is entered here will be placed in the generated source code, as well as the
 other supporting compilation files generated by Gpf.

 The maximum length for the Copyright field is sixty-three (63) characters.

 Task List Title

 The Task List title is entered into the Presentation Manager Task List box
 when the compiled Gpf application is actually running.  Users can move between
 active applications running under OS/2 by selecting a name from the task list.
 A short, descriptive, line of text is recommended for this entry.

 The maximum length for the Task List Title field is sixty-three (63)
 characters.

 Language

 The Language field is actually what is known as a Presentation Manager
 combination box. A combination box looks like an entry field with the
 exception that there is a downward-pointing arrow control on the far right
 side. By clicking this down arrow, a list of possible entries will be
 displayed. You can then choose an item from the list to fill in the top part
 of the combination box. You cannot enter text directly into the field for this
 combination box.

 Currently Gpf generates only 'C' language source code, subsequently it is the
 only available option for the Language field.

 Database Name

 The Database Name field is another combination box where you can choose which,
 if any, SQL databases are to be referenced in the current Gpf application
 being defined. When you start the Gpf editor, a search is automatically
 conducted to determine if there are any SQL databases available on your
 system.  Gpf will then fill the Database Name list with the results of the
 search.

 If  your application does not need to access information from an SQL database
 you can choose the 'No DBM' option, which is also the default.  You cannot
 enter text directly into the field for this combination box.

 OK             By clicking on the OK button (ALT+O) you will signal Gpf that
                you have completed any modifications in the Program Properties
                dialog window. Gpf will check the Program Properties dialog
                window and display an error message if there are any problems
                with your entries. Another way to signal Gpf that you want to
                save the changes you have made is by pressing the ENTER key.
 ACTION         The ACTION dialogs permit association of system or code
                functions with current circumstances, control manipulations,
                initializations, and so on. In the case of the Program
                Properties window, you will see two default circumstances for
                which actions can be invoked: Init Application and End
                Application. This permits specification of items which are to
                be performed upon program start and end.

 Please refer to Common Dialog Windows, section 3.10.3, for a detailed
 explanation of the Action dialog window.

 Entry Extended Help By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Program
                Properties dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your application. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Manager if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the application
           from the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section  for a detailed explanation
 of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1.4. PullDown Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Save Pull-down Action

The File Save pull-down (ALT+F,S) action will allow you to save the current Gpf
definition.

When you invoke the File Save action, a message will query you whether or not
you want to continue with the save operation. You can elect to cancel the save
operation by clicking on the NO button.  Clicking on the YES button will save
the definition.

The definition is saved to the file that you created with the File New
Pull-down Action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1.5. PullDown SaveAs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Save-As Pull-down Action

The File Save As (ALT+F,A) pull-down action is similar to the File Save action,
but instead allows you to save the current definition to a file other than the
original one created.

For example, suppose you are working on a Gpf definition from the file
"GPFTEST1.ORC", and decide after numerous changes that you want to save the
changes to a different file. By using the File Save As pull-down you can
preserve the original file by creating a new target file to save the current
changes to.  If you were to use the File Save action, you would save it to the
original file, which may not be what you desired.

The File Save As pull-down action invokes the File Save As dialog window in
Figure 3-5. In this dialog you can enter the name of the new file where you
want to save the current definition.  Refer to the File New Pull-down action
for guidelines on using file names. The File Save As dialog window provides the
following controls:

File Name

The File Name field is where you enter the filename of the current Gpf
definition that you want to save.  If you do not specify an extension, Gpf will
automatically append the '.ORC' extension onto the filename before saving it.

Directory Is

This informational, read only field will display the current working directory.
When you choose different directories and drives from the Directories list,
this field will be updated to reflect your selection.

Directories

The Directories list box allows you to save the new file to a different drive
and directory by selecting from the choices available.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                that you want to save the current Gpf definition to the file
                named in the File Name field.

           If the file name you have typed is unique in the target directory,
           Gpf will create a new definition file. If the file name already
           exists in the target directory, Gpf will prompt you with a message
           to confirm that you really want to overwrite the existing file.

           Note that even though Gpf creates and writes the current definition
           to a new filename on disk, the original definition will be retained
           in memory for your current edit session. If you want to have Gpf
           work with the newly named definition, use the File Open (ALT+F,O)
           action and reply NO when Gpf queries whether you want to save the
           current file to disk.

           If you changed the drive and directory in the File Save As dialog
           window, Gpf will retain it as the current working directory.  The
           next time you use a file manipulation action, Gpf will use the last
           specified directory as the target.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed the drive and directory in the File Save As
           dialog window, Gpf will retain it as the current working directory.
           The next time you use a file manipulation action Gpf will use the
           last set directory as the target.

 HELP           Clicking on the HELP button will invoke the Presentation
                Manager Help Facility. The Help window will provide you with
                information for options available for the File Save As pull-
                down action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1.6. PullDown Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Exit Pull-down Action

The final pull-down action available in File is the File Exit (ALT+F,X) action.

When you have completed your session with Gpf and want to exit the system, use
the File Exit pull-down action. Gpf will first prompt you to save the current
definition, if any, to disk before continuing with the shutdown. The following
will occur based on the response to the file save prompt:

 o If you answer CANCEL to the prompt, Gpf aborts the shutdown.
 o If you answer NO to the prompt, Gpf will exit and discard any changes you
   may have made to the current definition.
 o If you answer YES to the prompt, Gpf will save the current definition to
   disk before exiting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. ActionBar Create ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Pull-Down

Create Pull-down Overview

The Create pull-down actions provide a list of Presentation Manager control
windows (i.e. Windows, Buttons, Scroll Bars, etc.) that you can select from
when creating your application definition.

When you select a Create pull-down action, the Gpf cursor will turn into a
cursor marker until you point and click where you want the control to be
placed. Once the control has been placed, an initial definitions dialog box
will appear and you can further define the characteristics of the selected
control. The target window or dialog window where you want to place the newly
created control must be visible, otherwise the control is ignored.

As with other Gpf pull-down actions, you can either select the action with a
mouse click, or by using the (ALT+X,Y) keyboard combination, where X is the
underlined letter of the menu bar identifier and Y is the underlined letter of
the pull-down action that you want to execute. Each of the Create pull-down
actions will be described in general, and then will be covered in detail in the
order in which it  appears on the pull-down.

Create Window/Dialog (ALT+C,W)

The first action available on the Create pull-down is the Window/Dialog action.
When you choose Create Window/Dialog, Gpf creates a new Presentation Manager
Window. How you choose to use this window will determine whether or not it is
an independent window, child window, sibling window, or dialog window.

By default Gpf will generate the main standard window when you create the new
application definition. Refer to the File Pull-down section for a discussion of
creating a new application definition.

Create Menu (ALT+C,M)

The Create Menu action will generate a Menu Bar control for the target window.
You can direct Gpf to place the new menu control on any window/dialog in the
current definition.

By default the standard Gpf window has a menu bar already generated when you
create the new application definition.

Create Text Static (ALT+C,T)

The Create Text Static action will generate any type of static control (i.e.
Text, Icon, Bitmap, Groupbox) to be placed on the target window. By default,
Gpf will create a read-only static text control which can then be redefined.

Create Button (ALT+C,B)

The Create Button action will generate any type of button control (i.e. Push
Button, Radio Button, Check Box) to be placed on the target window. By default,
Gpf will create a pushbutton control which can then be redefined.

Create List Box (ALT+C,L)

The Create List Box action will generate a list box control to be placed on the
target window. The generated list box cannot be redefined to another type of
control, but the characteristics of the list box type (i.e. Sort Options, User
Drawn, etc.) may be modified.

Create Combo Box (ALT+C,C)

The Create Combo Box action will generate a combination box control. These
controls are actually both an entry Field control (see below), and a list box
control that act as one. Once you place the control, you can further modify its
characteristics. As with the list box control, the combination box cannot be
redefined.

Create Entry Field (ALT+C,E)

The Create Entry Field action will generate an entry field control on the
target window. You can set the characteristics of the entry field control, but
you cannot redefine it.

Create Multiple LE (ALT+C,U)

The Create Multiple LE action will generate a multiple line entry control on
the target window. The multiple line entry control is an extension of an entry
field control. With this control, the user can enter a number of lines of text
rather than the one line as in entry fields. Word wrapping, background and
foreground colors, as well as font sizes are but a few of the characteristics
available with a multiple line entry control.

Create Vert Scroll Bar (ALT+C,V)

The Create Vert Scroll action will generate a vertical scroll bar to be placed
on the target window. The vertical scroll bar cannot be redefined as another
type of control, but its characteristics may be modified.

Note that Gpf will allow you to define a vertical scroll bar as part of the
main window characteristics. This control is placed along the right edge of the
client window and cannot be repositioned. Use the Create Vert Scroll Bar
(ALT+C,V) action to attain the maximum flexibility of a scroll bar control.

Create Horz Scroll Bar (ALT+C,H)

The Create Horz Scroll action will generate a horizontal scroll bar to be
placed on the target window. The horizontal scroll bar cannot be redefined as
another type of control, but its characteristics may be modified.

Note that Gpf will allow you to define a horizontal scroll bar as part of the
main window characteristics. This control is placed along the bottom  edge of
the client window and can not be repositioned. Use the Create Horz Scroll Bar
(ALT+C,H) action to attain the maximum flexibility of a scroll bar control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.1. PullDown CreateWindow ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Window/Dialog (ALT+C,W)

You can generate a new window for your application definition through the use
of the Create Window/Dialog action. For example, if you need to create a dialog
window for a response to a menu selection you would use this option to first
create the window template. You could then design this template to
specification, adding the additional controls and actions that you want the
window to have.

When Gpf first generates the new window, it has the following characteristics:

           Title Bar
           System Menu
           Minimize and Maximize Buttons
           Sizing Border

 Unlike the standard window that Gpf generates when you use the File New
 (ALT,F,N) pull-down action, the generated window does NOT include a menu bar
 control. A menu bar can be added to this new window with the Create Menu
 (ALT+C,M) pull-down action.

 Once the new window is generated by the Create Window/Dialog action, the
 Window/Dialog Styles dialog window will appear to allow you to set the new
 window/dialog characteristics. Following is a description of each of the
 characteristic styles available for the new window, or dialog window. Figure
 3-6 can be used as a reference.

 As shown, the Window/Dialog Styles dialog window consists of a number of entry
 fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and pushbuttons. Some
 of these controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the
 following descriptions.

 Name

 Each window or dialog window you create is named. This name is used as a
 reference for other controls and is also used for function naming when
 application source code is generated. By default, Gpf will name the windows in
 chronological order as follows:

 MainWindow     This is the name given to the first window created by Gpf when
                you use the File New (ALT+F,N) action.
 Window1        This is the name given to the first window created by Gpf when
                you use the Create Window/Dialog (ALT+C,W) action.
 WindowX        This is the name given to each additional window created with
                the Create Window/Dialog action, where X is equal to the next
                sequential number of the  window created.

 For example, if you have created two windows using the Create Window/Dialog
 action, in addition to the window create from File New, the windows that Gpf
 will have generated would be:

           MainWindow
           Window1
           Window2

 You can enter a different name in this field if you do not want to use the
 names generated by Gpf. If you decide to change the default name, it would be
 best if you could make the window name as descriptive as possible. It is
 easier to guess the window relationship from a name such as:

           ListDataFieldsDialog

    rather than

           T5rKjd832 !

 Window Names can contain as many as 20 characters, including underscore
 characters (_), hyphens (-), and periods (.), as well as any letter or number.
 You cannot use spaces in the Names field.

 Before discussing the next two controls, Parent and Owner, it is appropriate
 to examine what effect these controls have on the newly created window and the
 rest of the application.

 Parent and Owner Window Relationships

 There are two types of relationships that exist for Presentation Manager
 windows: parent-child, and ownership. Both will be discussed, as well as the
 effect that setting the Parent and Owner controls has on a new window or
 dialog window.

 NOTE: The recommended Parent and Owner for MODAL dialog boxes is DESKTOP.

 Parent-Child Relationships

 With the exception of the Presentation Manager Desktop and Desktop-Object
 windows, most windows have a parent window. For example, the first window you
 create in an application uses the Presentation Manager Desktop window as its
 parent. This first window is considered to be a child of the Desktop window.

 All windows are drawn  relative to its parent window. All coordinates are
 based on the lower-left (0,0) corner of its parent window. For example, a
 window whose coordinates are (20,20) is placed 20 pixels left and 20 pixels up
 from the lower-left corner of its parent window.

 Many windows can share the same parent window; these are called sibling
 windows. Sibling windows can overlap on the screen; an application or a user
 can arrange the windows so that some appear on top of others. Each child
 window can have itself designated as a parent to a new window. Each child
 window in this chain of windows is called a descendant window of the original
 parent window.

 All child windows are clipped to the parent window, meaning that no part of a
 child window can exist outside of the parent. If the child window is larger
 then the client area of the parent window, the system will automatically clip
 the portion of the child that extends beyond the parent so that it does not
 appear.

 Setting the Parent control, in the Create Window/Dialog Styles dialog window,
 to DESKTOP will allow the new window to exist OUTSIDE of all the other defined
 windows in the application. The coordinate system is relative to the lower-
 left corner of the screen, which is the desktop window's lower-left corner.
 This window can be minimized, restored, or maximized, without effecting other
 windows within the application.

 Setting the Parent control in the Create Window/Dialog Styles dialog window to
 any window other than DESKTOP will cause the new window to appear WITHIN the
 boundaries of that designated parent. The new window will be clipped to the
 parent window so that if you shrink the parent window you will reduce the
 visible region of the child window. Also, if you hide or destroy the parent
 window, the child windows are hidden or destroyed as well.

 Ownership

 Any window can have an owner window. An owner is a window, not necessarily a
 parent window, that controls some aspect of another window. Ownership is
 typically used to establish a connection between  windows so that together
 they carry out useful tasks. This connection is usually in the form of
 messaging communications between the window and the owner.  For example, the
 title bar in an application's main window is owned by the frame window.
 Together they let the user move the entire application window by clicking the
 mouse in the title bar.

 Ownership establishes a relationship between windows that is independent of
 the parent-child relationship. Unlike parent and child windows, there are no
 predefined rules for how the owner and owned windows interact.

 Setting the Owner control in the Create Window/Dialog Styles dialog window to
 DESKTOP will establish ownership of the newly created window to the desktop
 window. The desktop will control the communication of messages to the newly
 created window.

 Setting the Owner control in the Create Window/Dialog Styles dialog window to
 any window other than DESKTOP will establish ownership of the newly created
 window to that of the designated window. The owner window will send messages
 to, and receive messages from, the newly created window.

 Window/Dialog Styles dialog window controls

 Parent

 The parent of the newly created window can be set from this control. The
 Parent control is a combination box which will list all the currently defined
 windows or dialog windows that were present when you created the new window.

 By default Gpf will list the DESKTOP window as the parent. You may select
 another window as the parent by clicking on the down arrow button on the
 Parent control. If there are any other windows that are defined in the current
 application, they will be listed here.

 Owner

 The owner of the newly created window can be set from this control. The Owner
 control is a combination box, like the Parent control, which will list all of
 the currently defined windows.

 By default Gpf will list the DESKTOP window as the owner of the newly created
 window. You may select another window as the owner by clicking on the down
 arrow button on the Owner control. If there are any other windows that are
 defined for the current application, they will be listed here.

 Title

 The Title control is an entry field where you can enter the text that you want
 to have appear in the newly created window's title bar. This text is typically
 the name of the application itself. For example, Gpf displays "Gpf Editor
 [Filename.ORC]" in its title bar.

 Title text can contain a maximum of 108 characters.

 Source

 The Source control is a combination box where you can select or define the
 name of the source file where you want Gpf to generate the newly defined
 window's source code.

 The name is not required to be the same name that is entered in the Main
 Window properties. When Gpf generates the source code for a multiple window
 and multiple source file definition, the appropriate compilation and link
 statements  will be generated as well.

 To select an existing source file name for the window, click the down arrow
 button on the combination box to display a list of defined source names. By
 clicking on a selection from this list, the entry field portion of the
 combination box will change to reflect the new choice.

 If you want to create a new source file for the window, position the mouse
 pointer at the beginning of the currently displayed source file and type the
 new name to replace it.

 Thread

 The Thread control is a combination box where you can select which thread the
 new window will execute under.

 To select a thread for the window, click the downward pointing arrow button on
 the combination box to display a list of defined thread names. By clicking on
 a selection from this list, the entry field portion of the combination box
 will change to reflect the chosen thread name.

 If you want to create a new thread of execution for the window, position the
 mouse pointer at the beginning of the currently displayed thread name and type
 the new name in to replace it.

 Gpf will automatically generate the necessary source code for creating an OS/2
 thread for the window.

 Presentation Client

 This control is a combination box where you can select the presentation
 parameters of the window client area, such as fonts, colors, visual frame
 attributes, etc.

 This combination box is read-only, therefore you will only be allowed to
 select from a list of pre-defined objects. To define these objects, see
 section 3.5.2.2. If none are defined there will be one and only one choice:
 NULL. The NULL choice specifies system defaults, as set via the Control Panel.

 To select a presentation for the window, click the downward pointing arrow
 button on the combination box to display the list of objectss. When you click
 on a selection from this list, the entry field portion of the combination box
 will change to reflect the color you chose. You will notice a small box marked
 "Color" in the Styles dialog window. As you choose a selection in the Color
 control this box will display a sample of the basic color of the selected
 presentation.

 Presentation Frame

 The Presentation control allows you to select an object from a list of
 Presentation Objects that were predefined for this application. These objects
 allow you to set the formatting and color of the basic frame being created.

 Like the Presentation Client control, the Presentation Frame control is a
 read-only combination box.

 To select a Presentation Object for the window title text, click the downward
 pointing arrow button on the combination box to display a list of Presentation
 Objects. By clicking on a selection from this list, the entry field portion of
 the combination box will change to reflect the object you chose. By default,
 this entry contains NULL.

 For a complete explanation of Presentation Objects, refer to the section
 titled Object Pull-down ( section 3.5).

 Icon

 The Icon control is a read-only combination box where you can set the icon
 that will be displayed when the window is minimized by the user.

 To select an icon for the window, click the downward pointing arrow button on
 the combination box.  A list of Icon Objects will be displayed. By clicking on
 a selection from this list, the entry field portion of the combination box
 will change to reflect the object you chose.  You will notice a small box
 marked "Icon" in the Styles dialog window.  As you choose a selection in the
 Icon control this box will display the actual icon.

 Icons are defined as Objects, just like Presentation Objects.  Refer to the
 section titled Object Pull-down, section 3.5, for a full description on
 defining Icon and Bitmap Objects.

 Choose Styles Group Box

 The Choose Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will affect
 the appearance of your window.

 Check boxes turn on the related style when there is an 'X' in the check box
 itself. If the check box is empty, Gpf will not generate the style for the
 window. Each of the styles available will be described.

  Title Bar     This option is set to on by default.  The title bar is located
                at the top of the window. Besides displaying text, the title
                bar is used to move the entire application window around on the
                screen. Click this check box off if you do not want to display
                a window title bar.
  Minimize Button This option is set to on by default. The minimize button
                allows a window to be minimized to an icon. Click this check
                box off if you do not want to have your window minimized.
                Setting this check box to off will also effectively ignore the
                Icon control selection.
  Maximize Button This option is set to on by default. The maximize button
                allows a window to be expanded to the borders of the windows
                parent - the entire screen in the case of the main window.
                Click this check box off if you do not want your application
                window to be maximized.
  System Menu   This option is set to on by default. The system menu provides
                the user with window sizing  and placement controls via
                keyboard commands and pull-down menu actions. Click this check
                box off if you do not want to have a system menu displayed on
                your application window.
  Appl Menu     This option is set to on for the first window created in the
                Gpf application definition, and set to off for each window
                created thereafter. If this option is on, and a menu bar has
                been created for the window, Gpf will display a warning that
                the existing menu bar will be destroyed if you click this check
                box to off. If this check box option is off, and you later
                create a menu for the window, Gpf will automatically set this
                to on.
  Horz Scroll Bar This option is set to off by default. If you click this check
                box on, Gpf will create a horizontal scroll bar along the
                bottom of the client window.
  Vert Scroll Bar This option is set to off by default. If you click this check
                box on, Gpf will create a vertical scroll bar along the right
                border ( facing the screen ) of the client window.
  Information Message This option is set to off by default. If you click this
                check box on, Gpf will allow you to display one line
                informational text in the Information message box. The
                Information message box is located along the bottom of the
                client window, above the horizontal scroll bar if one is
                defined. The text for the Information message box can be
                specified in the Entry Extended Help dialog box. Refer to the
                Common Dialog Window section of this document for an detailed
                explanation of the Information Message.

  Appl Modal    This option is set to off by default. Windows with the
                application modal style set to ON will not allow you to access
                other windows, or menus, within the application until the modal
                window is dismissed. This style is usually found set to ON for
                dialog windows.
  System Modal  This option is set to OFF by default. Windows with the system
                modal style set to ON will not only prevent you from accessing
                other windows or menus within the application, but will also
                prevent access to any other application on the system. The
                system modal style is typically set to on to signal the user of
                a critical error, or of some other reason that requires
                immediate attention.

           NOTE: It is recommended that MODAL dialog boxes have the DESKTOP as
           both owner and parent.

 Choose Options Group Box

 The Choose Options group box contains a number of check boxes that will effect
 how Presentation Manager controls various aspects of your window.

 Check boxes are considered to be turned ON for the related option when there
 is an 'X' in the check box itself. If the check box is empty, Gpf will not
 generate the option for the window. Each of the options available will be
 described.

  Logo          This option is set to OFF by default. The Logo is an opening
                window for your application, usually containing copyright or
                application specific information. Click this option ON if you
                want to have your application display a logo. Note that
                Presentation Manager can override this option if the PM Control
                Panel option for displaying a logo is set to OFF.
  Save Bits     This option is set to ON by default. The Save Bits instructs
                Presentation Manager to save the image under the window as a
                bitmap. When the window is moved or hidden, the system restores
                the image by copying the bits. Click this option to OFF if you
                do not want bitmap images saved.
  NoMoveWithOwner This option is set to OFF by default. This option will
                instruct Presentation Manager to create a window that will not
                move if the owner window moves. Click this option ON if you
                want your window NOT to move with the owner window.
  Adjust        This option is set to OFF by default. This GPF feature, when
                set to ON, will cause all controls to re-size if the enclosing
                window is re-sized. This effect can be viewed in ANIMATOR mode.
  SyncPaint     This option is set to ON by default. This option, when set to
                on, will cause the window to immediately receive WM_PAINT
                messages after a part of the window becomes invalid. When this
                option is set to OFF, the window receives WM_PAINT messages
                only if no higher priority messages are waiting to be processed
                in the window message queue.
  NoByteAlign   This option is set to OFF by default. This option will instruct
                Presentation Manager to create a window that is not byte
                aligned. If this option is set to OFF, Presentation Manager
                will align the window on an eight byte boundary. This results
                in faster screen drawings in the client window.

 Border Styles Group Box

 The Border Styles group box contains a number of radio buttons that will
 control the type of border your window will have.

 Radio buttons in a group box are mutually exclusive. Only one can be set to on
 in the group at one time. By clicking on the different border options, you
 will set the radio button ON for the new option, while turning the radio
 button OFF on the previously set option.

 Sizeable Border This option is set to OFF by default. The Sizeable Border
                option instructs Gpf to generate a border around the window
                that will allow the user to size the height and width of the
                window with the mouse or keyboard commands. This border style
                is typically used in most OS/2 Presentation Manager
                applications.
 Window Border  This option is set to OFF by default. The Window Border option
                instructs Gpf to generate a thin lined border around the
                window. The user cannot change the size of the window when this
                option is set to ON. This border type is typically used for
                windows that display a quick message to the user and are then
                dismissed.
 Dialog Border  This option is set to OFF by default. The Dialog Border option
                instructs Gpf to generate a border that is thicker than the
                Window Border. The user is still prohibited from changing the
                size of the window. This border type is typically used for
                dialog windows.
 No Border      This option is set to OFF by default. The No Border option
                instructs Gpf NOT to generate any border whatsoever around the
                window. This border type is typically used for windows with a
                parent other then the DESKTOP.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Window Styles dialog window.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the windows appearance, Gpf will automatically update the window to
           reflect those changes. For example, if the window was created with a
           Sizeable Border, and you change the border type to Window Border,
           the window's border will be changed to a Window Border type.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the window while in the Window
           Style dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes and restore the
           original control settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Window
                Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the general
                help text for your window. The text that you enter will be
                displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Manager if the user
                presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the window from the
           Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section for a detailed explanation
 of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A) will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the window during the following stages:

 Window Creation or Initialization - Presentation Manager

 creates or initializes every window or dialog window. The developer can change
 the default processing during the creation phase with either different
 pre-defined actions, or their own source code.

 Window Activation - After the above step, the window

 is then activated. The developer can change the default processing during the
 activation phase with either different pre-defined actions, or their own
 source code.

 Window DeActivation - This occurs when the user or application

 has dismissed or destroyed the window. The developer can change the default
 deactivation processing with either pre- defined actions, or their own source
 code.

 Each of the above are listed in the Action On dialog window. To select an
 action from the list box, either click on the target phase with the mouse, or
 use the directional keys  on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection are to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section.

 OK             When you are finished viewing or modifying the action
                processing for the window, click on the OK (ALT+O) button to
                return to the Window Styles dialog window.
 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                window as well as any children windows associated with the
                window. This option is NOT available for the main window, as
                every application must have at least one window.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this window, as well as any
           children of this window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.2. PullDown CreateMenu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Menu (ALT+C,M)

The Create Menu action allows you to add a menu bar to a window.

When you create a new Gpf application definition, the first window that is
created contains a default menu bar. For each additional window created, using
the Create Window/Dialog Window (ALT+C,W), Gpf does not generate a menu bar.

Clicking on the Create Menu (ALT+C,M) action will generate a menu bar and allow
you to attach it to any visible window. If the target window does not have a
menu bar already defined, Gpf will immediately invoke the Menu Options dialog
window. Refer to Figure 3-7.

Gpf will allow you to define three types of menu items: top level menu items,
pull-down actions, and submenu items.

Top level menu items are those that are directly visible in the application's
menu bar. Clicking on a top level menu item will typically display a
'pull-down' list of action items. Subsequently, each pull-down action item can
have a pull-down list of menu items, called a submenu. The following text and
control descriptions apply to all three of these menu types.

As shown, the Menu Options dialog window consists of a number of entry fields,
combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and push buttons. Some of these
controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the following
descriptions.

Name

Each menu item has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the menu in
response to user input, either from the mouse or the keyboard. The application
responds to these messages by using the identifier of the menu item that is
contained in each menu message.

Text

You can specify the text that is displayed in the menu or pull-down with the
Text entry field.

You can indicate a mnemonic keystroke for the menu item by preceding that
character in the item text with a tilde, as in "~Open". The user can choose
that item by pressing the mnemonic key when the menu is active.

A menu item can have a keyboard accelerator associated with it. Accelerators
differ from mnemonic keystrokes in that the menu does not have to be active for
the accelerator key to work. Typically the accelerator is displayed to the
right of the menu item. This is done by placing a tab character (\t) in the
menu text before the characters that should be displayed on the right. For
example, to indicate that the F3 function key can be used to exit the
application, the text field entry would contain:

        Exit\tF3

Refer to the Accelerator Key description for generating the proper accelerator
for your menu item.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays, and allows you to
choose, which menu item is a sibling to the currently displayed menu item.

You can re-arrange the position that the menu item appears in by changing the
sibling relationship. The siblings are listed from either the top of the
pull-down list order or across for top level menu items.

Parent and Owner

The Parent and Owner controls are read-only displays which indicate the
respective Parent and Owner of the menu bar. Gpf sets this relationship
automatically, with the menu directly communicating (sending messages) with the
window it is attached to.

Accelerator Key

The Accelerator Key control is a combination box which lists all the available
key combinations that can be used for the current menu item definition.

Keyboard accelerators provide an optional interface, the keyboard, for
selecting menu items. Accelerators associate keystrokes with menu action items
and therefore do not require the menu itself to be active.

You can select an Accelerator Key from the Accelerator Key combination box for
the current menu item definition by scrolling through the list of predefined
keystroke combinations and clicking on the desired one.

Submenu Presentation

The Submenu Presentation combination box includes a list of all defined
Presentation Objects.  Refer  to the Objects Pull- down (section 3.5) in this
documentation for a description on creating Presentation Objects.

The Presentation Object can change the appearance ( i.e. Foreground and
Background Color,  Font and Font Sizes,  Borders,   etc. ) of the pull-down
menu items.

You can select a Submenu Presentation object by scrolling through the list of
Presentation Objects and clicking on your choice.

Menu Styles Group Box

The Menu Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that affect how
Presentation Manager displays the menu item.

Check boxes are considered to be turned on for the related option when there is
an 'X' in the check box itself. If the check box is empty, Gpf will not
generate the option for the menu item.  Each of the options available will be
described:

  Break         This option is set to off by default. Presentation Manager will
                start a new row or column for the menu item when it encounters
                this style.
  Static        This option is set to off by default. When the Static style
                option is set to on, the menu item is displayed as an
                informational item only. The user cannot select a menu item
                with this type, with either the mouse or keyboard.
  Button Separator This option is set to off by default. When the Button
                Separator style option is set to on, the item cannot be
                selected by using the keyboard cursor keys. The item can only
                be selected with the mouse or defined accelerator keys.
  Break Separator This option is set to off by default.  This style is the same
                as is described above for the Break style, with the exception
                that Presentation Manager will draw a separator line between
                the menu row or column.

 Menu Attributes Group Box

 The Menu Attributes group box contains a number of check boxes that control
 the display aspects of a menu item, such as its highlighted and checked state.

 Check boxes controls are considered to be turned on for the related option
 when there is an 'X' in the check box itself. If the check box is empty, Gpf
 will not generate the option for the menu item. Each of the options available
 will be described.

  No Dismiss    This option is set to OFF by default. When this option is set
                to ON, the menu which contains the current menu item will not
                be dismissed, even after the user makes a menu selection. The
                application becomes responsible for removing the menu from
                view.
  Framed        This option is set to OFF by default. If this option is set to
                ON, the menu item will be framed by vertical lines to the left
                and right.
  Checked       This option is set to OFF by default. If this option is set to
                ON, the menu item will have a check mark to the left of it when
                displayed. The application must control turning the check on
                and off on a menu item during program run- time.
  Disabled      This option is set to OFF by default. The Disabled attribute,
                when set to ON, will gray out the menu item. The user may view
                a grayed menu item, but the system will issue an error beep
                when the menu item is clicked upon. The application is
                responsible for setting and clearing the disabled state of a
                menu item during program run-time.
  Highlighted   This option is set to OFF by default. Presentation Manager will
                normally highlight the topmost pull-down item when a menu list
                is displayed. Set this option ON if you would rather have a
                different menu item highlighted at run-time.

 Menu Type Group Box

 The Menu Type group box contains a number of radio buttons which indicate what
 type of object the menu item is.

 Radio buttons in a group box are mutually exclusive; only one can be set to on
 in the group. Each of the menu types will be described.

 Text           This is the default menu type. The menu item is displayed as a
                text string.
 Bitmap         This menu type allows you to include a bitmap drawing as the
                menu item. When you enable this option, Gpf will activate the
                bitmap display box and the bitmap object combination box. The
                display box is located to the right of the bitmap option, and
                the combination box is at the bottom of the Type group box. The
                bitmaps must have been previously identified as an object to
                appear in the combination box list. Refer to the Objects
                Pull-down section (Section 3.5) for information on defining
                bitmap objects.
 Separator      This menu type is set to off by default. The Separator type
                will generate a non-selectable horizontal  line in the menu
                pull-down list. This is helpful for separating logical groups
                of pull-down actions in the same menu. Any text entered in the
                Text Entry Field is ignored when the Separator type is
                selected.

 Owner Draw     This menu type is set to off by default. When a menu type is
                defined to be of type Owner Draw, then the application is
                responsible for drawing, redrawing, and dismissing the menu.
                The application receives notification messages from the menu
                bar each time a draw request needs to be serviced.

 OK             Click on the OK (ALT+O) button when you are finished viewing or
                modifying the top level, pull-down, or submenu item, and want
                to save the item definitions or changes.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the menu item while in the Menu
           Options dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes and restore the
           original menu settings.

 PULLDOWN       Top level menu items can have a pull-down action list of menu
                items associated with them. The PULLDOWN (ALT+P) button will
                allow you to add, edit, or remove pull-down action items.

           Clicking on the PULLDOWN button will invoke the Selection Pull-down
           dialog window. The Selection Pull-down dialog window will list the
           pull-down action items already defined for the top level.

           Double clicking on an available pull-down item in the list will
           invoke a nested Menu Options dialog window. The control options are
           the same as the ones used when defining the top level menu item with
           the exception that the PULLDOWN button is renamed to SUBMENU.

           If no pull-down items have been defined, you must first add one with
           the ADD ITEM (ALT+A) button.

           Each pull-down menu item can have a submenu associated with it.
           Submenus typically provide 'in line' menu options for the particular
           pull-down action, as opposed to invoking dialog boxes for user
           input.

           Submenu items are defined using the Menu Options dialog window, just
           like the pull-down and top level menu items.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Help (ALT+E) button in the Menu Options
                dialog window, you will be able to define the general help text
                for your menu item. The text that you enter will be displayed
                by the Presentation Manager Help Manager if the user presses
                the F1 key when the menu is the active selection.

           You can also define an informational message for the menu item from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section for a detailed explanation
 of the Entry Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions desired for the menu item when the user selects it. The
                Action On dialog window allows you to define processing for the
                following user action:

               Click

 When the user clicks on the menu item with the mouse, or invokes the menu item
 with an accelerator key. You can define the action associated with the menu
 item selection with pre-defined, or user developed source code.

 The click option is listed in the Action On dialog window. To select an action
 from the list box, either click on the target with the mouse, or use the
 directional keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection is to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section.

 OK             Once you are finished viewing or modifying the action
                processing for the menu, click on the OK (ALT+O) button to
                return to the Menu Options Styles dialog window.

           If you are nested in defining pull-down menu items, or submenus, Gpf
           will return to the next highest level. Continue  to click the OK
           button until you return to the Gpf edit screen.

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                menu item as well as any pull-down menu items associated with
                the menu.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this menu item, as well as any
           pull-down children of this menu item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.3. PullDown CreateStatic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Text Static (ALT+C,T)

Clicking on the Create Text Static (ALT+C,T) action will generate a static text
control item and allow you to attach it to any visible window. Once the control
is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will invoke the Static
Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-8.

Static controls are simple text fields, bitmaps, or icons that can be used to
label, enclose, or separate other window control windows. Static controls do
not accept user input and they do not send notification messages to their
owning applications.

As shown, the Static Control Styles dialog window consists of a number of entry
fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and push buttons. Some
of these controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the following
descriptions:

Name

Each static text control item has an identifying name. During program
execution, the application's window procedure can manipulate the item using
this name as an argument to the OS/2 Presentation Manager API functions.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the item currently
being defined.

Text

The Text control is an entry field where you can type in the text associated
with the currently created item.

Item definitions where text entries are ignored will be identified at the
appropriate control item description.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size, foreground, background,
and border colors for the static control being defined.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.5) for information on
defining presentation objects.

Static Control Styles Group Box

The Static Control Styles group box contains a number of radio buttons that
define  what type of control the newly created item is.

Radio buttons in a group box are mutually exclusive, only one can be set to on
in the group at one time. Each of the control styles are described as follows:

 Text           This option is set to on by default. With the control style of
                Text, various formatting options are available to produce
                formatted text in the boundaries of the control. The text
                entered in the text entry field control is displayed. Refer to
                the discussions of Horizontal and Vertical Options following
                this (Static Control Styles Group Box) section.
 Group Box      This option is set to off by default. Group boxes are useful
                for grouping other kinds of control items, such as radio
                buttons and check boxes. The text entered in the text entry
                field control is displayed in the upper left corner of the
                group box when displayed in the application or dialog window.
 ForeGround Frame This option is set to off by default. A control with this
                style is drawn as a rectangular frame with the current
                foreground color. Any text entered in the Text entry field is
                ignored with this option.
 BackGround Frame This option is set to off by default. A control with this
                style draws a filled rectangle with the current background
                color. Any text entered in the Text entry field is ignored with
                this option.
 Half Tone Frame This option is set to off by default. Half tone frames draw a
                rectangular frame with a halftone pattern in the current
                foreground color. Any text entered in the Text entry field is
                ignored with this option.

 Icon           This option is set to off by default. Click on this style if
                you want to display an icon on the application or dialog
                window. The icon must have been previously identified as an
                object to Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull- down section (Chapter
                3.5) for information on defining icon objects.
 Bitmaps        This option is set to off by default. Click on this style if
                you want to display a bitmap on the application or dialog
                window. The bitmap must have been previously identified as an
                object to Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter
                3.5) for information on defining bitmap objects.

 If either Icon or Bitmap is selected as a style, the Icon/Bitmap combination
 box will become  active with a list of defined Icon/Bitmap objects. Selecting
 an object from the combination box will also fill in the Icon/Bitmap view box
 located to the right of the Icon and Bitmap style radio button.

 ForeGround Rect This option is set to off by default. This style draws a
                rectangle filled with the current foreground color. Any text
                entered in the Text entry field is ignored with this option.
 BackGround Rect This option is set to off by default. This style draws a
                rectangle filled with the current background color. Any text
                entered in the Text entry field is ignored with this option.
 Half Tone Rect This option is set to off by default. This style will draw a
                rectangle filled with a halftone pattern with the current
                foreground color. Any text entered in the Text entry field is
                ignored with this option.

 Horz Options Group Box

 The horizontal placement of the text in the Text field entry is controlled by
 the options in this group box. These options are only available if the style
 for the static control is marked Text.

 Being radio button options, the horizontal controls are mutually exclusive.

 Left Aligned   This option is set to on by default. Setting the Left Aligned
                option will draw the text entered in the text entry field flush
                left with the text box border.
 Horizontal Centered This option is set to off by default. This option will
                center the text between the left and right boundaries of the
                text box.
 Right Aligned  This option is set to off by default. Setting the Right Aligned
                option will draw the text entered in the text entry field flush
                right with the text box border.

 Vert Options Group Box

 The vertical placement of the text in the Text field entry is controlled by
 the options in this group box. As with the horizontal controls, the style of
 the static control must be set at Text.

 Being radio button options, the vertical controls are mutually exclusive.

 Top Aligned    This option is set to off by default. The Top Aligned option
                will draw the text entered in the Text entry field, starting in
                the top line of the text box.
 Vert Centered  This option is set to on by default. Vertical centering will
                align the text between the top and bottom borders of the text
                box. This is typically used for single line text entries.
 Bottom Aligned This option is set to off by default.  This option will draw
                the text entered in the Text entry field, starting along the
                bottom border of the text box.

 Text Options Group Box

 The Text Options group box contains a number of check boxes that will effect
 the overall appearance of your text.

 Check boxes are considered to turn on the related style when there is an 'X'
 in the check box itself. If the check box is empty, Gpf will not generate the
 option for the text. Each of the styles available will be described.

  Word Wrap     This option is set to off by default. Click on this option if
                the text entry extends for more than one line, or if the text
                box is too small. Word wrap will automatically wrap the text to
                fit into the defined text box boundary.
  Half Tone     This option is set to off by default. Setting this option on
                will display the text in a halftone pattern with the current
                text color.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current static control. Typically these options are
 used for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the static control will act as the first member of a number of
                other controls in a group.  It will also be able to receive the
                keyboard or mouse focus. The group style remains in effect
                until the next control with a style such as this is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to off by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will be able to receive the focus when the user
                presses the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Static Control Styles dialog window and save your changes.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the controls appearance, Gpf will automatically update the control
           to reflect those changes.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the control while in the Static
           Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes and
           restore the original control settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Static
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility  if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (Chapter 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         Because static controls do not allow user input, the ACTION
                button is disabled.
 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                static control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this control, as well as any
           children of this control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.4. PullDown CreateButton ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Button (ALT+C,B)

Clicking on the Create Button (ALT+C,B) action will generate a push button
control item and allow you to attach it to any visible window. Once the control
is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will invoke the Button
Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-9.

There are four main types of buttons: push buttons, radio buttons, check boxes,
and three-state check boxes. The appearance and behavior of button controls is
determined by the style of the button. There is also the user defined, or
'owner drawn' button which allows you to place a bitmap or icon on the window
which will send notification messages to the application. The owner of the user
defined button is responsible for the appearance of the button.

As shown, the Button Control Styles dialog window consists of a number of entry
fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and push buttons. Some
of these controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the following
descriptions:

Name

Each button control has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the button in
response to user input, either from the mouse or the keyboard. The application
responds to these messages by using the identifier of the button control.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays, and allows you to
choose which control item or window is a sibling of the item currently being
defined.

Text

The Text control is an entry field where you specify the text that will appear
inside, or next to, the button. Typically you can set a mnemonic character in
the text so the user can select the button with the keyboard. For example, a
button with the following text:

           ~Select Me

 would allow the user to select the button by pressing ALT+S. Use the tilde
 character (~) to identify the mnemonic character.

 Presentation

 The Presentation control is a combination box which displays, and allows you
 to choose, a presentation object for setting the font size, foreground and
 background, and border colors of the button control.

 The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
 Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.5) for information on
 defining presentation objects.

 Control Styles Group Box

 The Control Styles group box contains a number of radio buttons that define
 what type of button the newly created control is.

 Radio buttons in a group box are mutually exclusive; only one can be set to on
 in the group at one time. Each of the control styles will be described:

 Radio Button   This option is set to off by default. Radio buttons are
                typically used in a mutually exclusive group. The application
                is responsible for responding to state changes (i.e. button
                clicked messages) for this button as well as other radio
                buttons within the group.
 Auto Radio Button This option is set to off by default. This style is similar
                to the Radio Button, but the state changes are handled
                automatically by the system. The state of the button can be
                checked with OS/2 Presentation Manager API calls.
 Check Box      This option is set to off by default. A check box is a small
                square that is empty when it is not selected, and contains a
                small 'x' when selected. The text for the check box is
                displayed to the right of the small square. As with the Radio
                Button, the owner application window is responsible for
                changing the check box state.
 Auto Check Box This option is set to off by default. This style is similar to
                the Check Box, but the state changes are handled automatically
                by the system. As with auto radio buttons, the state of the
                check box can be queried and set with OS/2 Presentation Manager
                API calls.
 3 State        This option is set to off by default. The 3 State check box
                extends the normal check box, except that it toggles  between
                selected, unselected, and halftone states. The owner
                application window is responsible for changing the 3 state
                appearance.
 Auto 3 State   This option is set to off by default. The Auto 3 State check
                box is similar to the 3 State check box, but the state changes
                are handled automatically by the system. There are API calls
                available for checking the current status of the Auto 3 State.
 Push Button    This option is set to on by default. The Push Button is the
                classic button style. When the user clicks on this button, or
                optionally uses a mnemonic key, the button sends notification
                messages to the owner window.
 User Button    This option is set to off by default. The User Button can be a
                bitmap object drawn by the user. As with the normal push
                button, notification messages are sent to the owner window when
                the button is selected. When this option is selected, both the
                Normal and Hilited Bitmap combination boxes are enabled. You
                can select a defined bitmap object for both the normal and
                highlighted state of the button. Bitmaps must have been
                identified as an object to appear in the combination box list.
                Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.5) for
                information on defining bitmap objects.

 Button Options Group Box

 The Button Options group box contains a number of check boxes that define the
 operational characteristics of the button. This group box is only enabled when
 the Push Button or User Button styles have been chosen.

 Being check boxes, Gpf will generate the option if set to ON, and you may
 combine more than one option per button. Each of the options will be described
 below:

  Default       This option is set to off by default. A button with this style
                is outlined with a heavy black border. A user can select this
                button by pressing the ENTER key.
  No Focus      This option is set to off by default. A button with this style
                does not receive the focus, even when selected.
  No Cursor     This option is set to off by default. With this style set the
                user will be unable to move the focus to this button using the
                keyboard cursor keys.
  No Border     This option is set to off by default. With this style set, the
                button is drawn without a border, in effect removing the
                'button' look and feel. These buttons, when selected, will
                still send notification messages to the application.

 Alias Group Box

 Presentation Manager maintains certain default notification messages for
 pushbuttons. The Alias group box allows you to define one of these for the
 current button control.

 Being radio buttons, these options are mutually exclusive. Note that Aliasing
 is only allowed for buttons with the Push Button style set.

 None           This option is set to on by default. The currently defined
                button does not send an aliased notification message to the
                application window. In this case, the message sent is the
                contents of the name entered in the Name entry field.
 Ok             This option is set to off by default. With this button option,
                the defined button will send the application window a DID_OK
                message.
 Cancel         This option is set to off by default. With this button option,
                the defined button will send the application window a
                DID_CANCEL message.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current button control. Typically these options are
 used for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to off by default. With this style set to
                on, the button control will act as the first member of a number
                of other buttons in a group. It will receive the keyboard or
                mouse focus. The group style remains in effect until the next
                control with a style such as this is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Button Control Styles dialog window and will save your changes.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change  to
           the button control appearance, Gpf will automatically update the
           button to reflect those changes.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the button control while in the
           Button Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes and
           restore the original settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Static
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions desired for the button control item when the user
                selects it. The Action On dialog window allows you to define
                processing for the following user action:

           Click- This user action occurs when the user clicks on the button
           control item with the mouse, or invokes the button control item with
           an accelerator key. You can define the action associated with the
           button control item selection from a list of pre-defined actions, or
           with user developed source code.
           The click option is listed in the Action On dialog window. To select
           an action from the list box, either click on the target with the
           mouse, or use the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection is to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10).

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                button control item.

           When you select this option, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this button, as well as any
           children of this control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.5. PullDown CreateListBox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Listbox (ALT+C,L)

Clicking on the Create Listbox (ALT+C,L) action will generate a list box
control and allow you to attach it to any visible window. Once the control is
placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will invoke the Listbox
Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-10.

As shown, the Listbox Control Styles dialog window consists of a number of
entry fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and pushbuttons.
Some of these controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the
following descriptions:

Name

Each listbox has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the listbox in
response to user input. The application responds to these messages by using
this identifier of the listbox control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate
items in a list box using the Name identifier as an argument.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays, and allows you to
choose which control item, or window, will be a sibling of the listbox
currently being defined.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size, foreground and
background, and border colors of the listbox items.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section for information on defining
presentation objects.

Control Styles Group Box

The Control Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that define what
type of attributes can be applied to the listbox control.

Being check boxes, Gpf will generate the option if it is set to on. You may
combine more than one option per listbox. Each of the options will be described
below:

  Horizontal Scroll Bar This option is set to off by default. When Gpf
                generates the listbox control, it is automatically drawn with a
                vertical scroll bar. Click this option on if you want a
                horizontal scroll bar drawn on this listbox as well.
  Multiple Selection This option is set to off by default. With this option on,
                a user can select multiple listbox items as opposed to just one
                item.

  Owner Draw    This option is set to on by default. When the listbox must be
                redrawn, Presentation Manager will send a notification message
                to the owner window of the list box. This includes when items
                must be hilited ( selected ). Another important effect of Owner
                Draw is the proper columnar alignment of proportional font
                text, e.g. when several fields of a DBM table is displayed in
                the listbox.
  No Adjust Position This option is off by default. With this option set to on,
                the listbox height will automatically adjust to a multiple of
                the height of a listbox selection.

 Sort Options Group Box

 The Sort Options group box contains a number of radio buttons that define how
 text items that fill the listbox should be sorted. This option is active only
 if the items being loaded are done so via SQL\DBM table functions, i.e. these
 must be columns from the database selected in the Program Properties screen.

 Radio buttons in a group box are mutually exclusive; only one can be set to on
 in the group at one time . Each of the sort options will be described as
 follows:

 None           This option is on by default. Text items in a listbox are
                listed in the order that they were inserted in.
 Ascending      This option is set to off by default. This option will cause
                text items to be inserted in ascending alphabetical order into
                the listbox.
 Descending     This option is set to off by default. This option will cause
                text items to be inserted in descending alphabetical order into
                the listbox.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current listbox control. Typically these options are
 for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the listbox control will act as an encapsulated group. It will
                receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group style remains in
                effect until the next control with a style such as this is
                found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Listbox Control Styles dialog window.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the listbox control appearance, Gpf will automatically update the
           listbox to reflect those changes.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the button control while in the
           Listbox Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes
           and restore the original settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) button in the
                Static Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define
                the general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows (section 3.10) for a detailed
 explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ASSOCIATE      This button is active if you have specified a database in the
                Program Properties (see Files pulldown) screen. If active,
                pressing this button will place you in the Associate dialog, as
                described in the Common Dialog Windows section, 3.10. Briefly
                speaking, from here you can specify which tables\columns to
                extract from your DB, and what is to be done with them.
 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the listbox control item when the user selects it.
                The Action On dialog window allows you to define processing for
                the following user actions:

           Click - Presentation Manager generates a notification message to the
           owning window when the user clicks on any item in the list box.

           Double Click - Double clicking on an item in a listbox will cause
           Presentation Manager to send a LN_ENTER notification message to the
           listbox owner. This message, in effect, simulates a user pressing
           the ENTER key.

           Set and Kill Focus - When an item in a listbox is selected, the
           listbox is given focus by the system. When another control, menu,
           button, etc., is chosen outside of the listbox, the listbox loses
           the focus.

 The above options are listed in the Action On dialog window. To select an
 action from the list box, either click on the target with the mouse, or use
 the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection is to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10).

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                listbox control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this listbox control, as well as
           any children of this listbox.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.6. PullDown CreateComboBox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Combobox (ALT+C,C)

Clicking on the Create Combobox (ALT+C,C) action will generate a combination
box control and allow you to attach it to any visible window. Once the control
is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will invoke the Combobox
Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-11.

Combobox controls are combination boxes. A combination box is two controls in
one: an entry field and a list box. Combination boxes let the user enter data
by typing in the entry field or by choosing from a list in the list box.

As shown, the Combobox Control Styles dialog window consists of entry fields,
combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and pushbuttons. Some of these
controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the following
descriptions:

Name

Each combobox has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the combination
box in response to user input. The application responds to these messages by
using this identifier of the combination box control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate
items in a combination box using the Name identifier as an argument.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the Combobox currently
being defined.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size and the foreground,
background and border colors of the Combobox items.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section for information on defining
presentation objects.

Control Styles Group Box

The Control Styles group box contains a number of radio buttons that define the
Combobox style.

Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one option can be set at one time.
Each of the combination box options will be described below:

 Simple         This option is set to OFF by default. A simple combination box
                displays its list box. The user can enter and edit text in the
                entry field or choose items from the list box.
 Drop Down      This option is set to OFF by default. A simple drop down
                combination box displays its list box only if the user clicks
                the drop down button at the right end of the entry field. It
                hides the list box when the user clicks the drop down button a
                second time. In a drop down combination box, the user can enter
                and edit text in the entry field or choose items from the list
                box.
 Drop Down List This option is set to ON by default. A drop down list
                combination box is similar to the simple drop down combination
                box, but the user cannot enter or edit text in the entry field.
                The user can only choose items from the list box.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current Combobox control. Typically these options are
 used for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the Combobox control will act as an encapsulated group. It will
                receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group style remains in
                effect until the next control with a style such as this is
                found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Combobox Control Styles dialog window.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the Combobox control while in
           the Combobox Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the
           changes and restore the original settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking  the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Static
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control with
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the Combobox control item when the user selects it.
                The Action On dialog window allows you to define processing for
                the following user actions:

           Click - Presentation Manager generates a notification message to the
           owning window when the user clicks on any item in the list box.
           Double Click - Double clicking on an item in a Combobox will cause
           Presentation Manager to send a notification message to the Combobox
           owner. This message, in effect, simulates a user pressing the ENTER
           key.
           Change Data - When an item in a Combobox entry field is changed, the
           Combobox sends a notification message to the owner window.

 The above options are listed in the Action On dialog window. To select an
 action from the list box, either click on the target with the mouse, or use
 the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection is to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (Chapter 3.10).

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                Combobox control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this Combobox control, as well as
           any children of this Combobox.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.7. PullDown CreateEntryField ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Entry Field (ALT+C,E)

Clicking on the Create Entry Field (ALT+C,E) action will generate an entry
field control and allow you to attach it to any visible window. Once the
control is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will invoke the
Entry Field Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-12.

Entry fields are rectangular windows that display a single line of text a user
can edit. When an entry field has the focus, it displays a flashing bar, called
the cursor, that marks the current point where text can be entered. Entry
fields send notification messages to the owner window when gaining or losing
focus, or when the contents of the entry field have changed.

As shown, the Entry Field Control Styles dialog window consists of entry
fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and pushbuttons. Some of
these controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the following
descriptions:

Name

Each entry field has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the entry field
in response to user input. The application responds to these messages by using
this identifier of the entry field control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate text
in the entry field using the Name identifier as an argument.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the entry field
currently being defined.

Text

You can specify the text that is displayed in the entry field with this option.
The application can replace this default text during runtime as well using OS/2
Presentation Manager API calls.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size, as well as the
foreground, background, and border colors of the entry field text.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.X.X) for information on
defining presentation objects.

Text Styles Group Box

The Text Styles group box contains a number of radio buttons that define how
the text in the entry field will be drawn.

Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one option can be set at one time.
Each of the entry field options will be described below.

 Left Aligned   This option is set to on by default. Entry field controls with
                this style will display text flush left within the control
                window.
 Centered       This option is set to off by default. Click this option on if
                you want to center the text in the entry field control window.
 Right Aligned  This option is set to off by default. Entry field controls with
                this style will display text flush right within the control
                window.

 Entry Field Options Group Box

 The Entry Field Options group box contains a number of check boxes that
 control the display and formatting of text in the entry field control.

 Being check boxes, Gpf will generate the option if set to on. You may combine
 more than one option with the entry field control.    Each of the options are
 described as follows:

  Margin        This option is set to ON by default. The margin option will
                paint a wide border around the entry field control window.
  Command       ** currently undefined except in PM SDK header files.  Reserved
                for future expansion.
  Autoscroll    This option is set to on by default. With this option set to
                on, the entry field control will scroll lengthy text within the
                control window horizontally.
  Unreadable    This option is set to off by default. When this option is
                selected,  any text entered in the entry field control will be
                masked with asterisk '*' characters. This is a useful option
                for entering passwords, or other sensitive data entry items.
  Autotab       ** currently undefined.
  Read Only     This option is off by default. When this option is set to on,
                the user cannot change the text within the entry field.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics for the current entry field control. Typically, these options
 are for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the entry field control will act as an encapsulated group. It
                will receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group style
                remains in effect until the next control with a similar style
                is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 Control Window Group Box

 The Control Window group box provide additional options for setting
 characteristics of an entry field control.

  Max Length    This option is off by default. When the check box is set, a
                text length entry field is displayed. You can set the maximum
                length of characters that the user may enter with this option.

                NOTE: this function is disabled if the current field is
                associated with a database (selected in the Program Properties
                dialog.)

  Picture Mask  ** currently undefined.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Entry Field Control Styles dialog window.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the Entry Field control while in
           the Entry Field Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the
           changes and restore the original settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Entry Field
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the Entry Field control item when the user selects
                it. The Action On dialog window allows you to define processing
                for the following user actions:

           Kill Focus - When the entry field loses the keyboard focus, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.
           Set Focus - When the entry field receives the keyboard focus, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.
           Change Data - When the contents of the entry field changes, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.
           The above options are listed in the Action On dialog window. To
           select an action from the list box, either click on the target with
           the mouse, or use the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection are to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows and associated processes are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (Chapter 3.10).

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                Entry Field control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm  that you want to destroy this Entry Field control, as well
           as any children of this Entry Field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.8. PullDown CreateMLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Multiple LE (ALT+C,U)

Clicking on the Create Multiple LE (ALT+C,U) action will generate a Multiple
Line Entry Field (MLE) control and allow you to attach it to any visible
window. Once the control is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf
will invoke the Multiple Line Entry Control Styles dialog window. Refer to
Figure 3-13.

A Multiple Line Entry Field is a sophisticated entry field control window that
the user can use to view and edit multiple lines of text. In addition, a
multiple line entry field provides all the text editing capability of a simple
text editor, making these features readily available to applications.

As shown, the Multiple Line Entry Field Control Styles dialog window consists
of entry fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and
pushbuttons. Some of these controls are located in group boxes and will be
noted in the following descriptions:

Name

Each Multiple LE control has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the Multiple LE
control in response to user input. The application responds to these messages
by using this identifier of the Multiple LE control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate text
in the Multiple Line Entry field using the handle of the MLE as an argument.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the Multiple Line
Entry field currently being defined.

Text

You can specify the text that is initially displayed in the Multiple Line Entry
field with this option. The application can replace this default text during
runtime as well by using OS/2 Presentation Manager API calls.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size, as well as foreground,
background, and border colors of the Multiple Line Entry field text.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.5) for information on
defining presentation objects.

Control Styles Group Box

The Control Styles group box contains a number of check boxes which allow you
to set a number of characteristic styles for the Multiple LE field control.
Each of the Multiple LE options will be described below.

Check boxes are considered to be set to on when a small 'x' appears in the
check box.

  Border        This option is set to ON by default. With this option set to
                on, the Multiple LE field will have a black border drawn around
                it.
  Vert Scroll Bar This option is set to on by default. A vertical scroll bar is
                added to the Multiple LE. The initial state of the scroll bar
                is disabled until the number of lines of text exceed the
                Multiple LE height.
  Word Wrap     This option is set to ON by default. When a line of text
                exceeds the length ( width ) of the Multiple LE, lines will
                automatically break at a convenient place in the text and wrap
                to the next line.
  Horz Scroll Bar This option is set to OFF by default. A horizontal scroll bar
                is added to the Multiple LE. The initial state of the scroll
                bar is disabled until the width of the text line exceeds the
                Multiple LE width.
  Read Only     This option is set to OFF by default. With this option set, the
                Multiple LE will not accept any date edit or entries. This is
                typically used to display static text.
  Ignore Tab    This option is set to on by default. This directs the Multiple
                LE to ignore tabs entered by the user.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current Multiple LE field control. Typically these
 options are for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the Multiple LE field control will act as an encapsulated
                group. It will receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group
                style remains in effect until the next control with a style
                such as this is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Multiple Line Entry Control Styles dialog window.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the Multiple LE Field control
           while in the Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the
           changes and restore the original settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Multiple
                Line Entry Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to
                define the general help text for your control. The text that
                you enter will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help
                Facility if the user presses the F1 key during application run
                time.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the Multiple LE field control item when the user
                selects it. The Action On dialog window allows you to define
                processing for the following user actions:

           Kill Focus - When the Multiple LE field loses the keyboard focus, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.

           Set Focus- When the Multiple LE field receives the keyboard focus, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.

           Change Data- When the contents of the Multiple LE field have
           changed, a notification message is sent to the owner window.

           The above options are listed in the Action On dialog window. To
           select an action from the list box, either click on the target with
           the mouse, or use the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection are to be viewed or modified, click the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10).

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                current Multiple LE field control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this Multiple LE Field, as well as
           any children of this control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.9. PullDown Create Vert Scroll Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Vertical Scroll Bar (ALT+C,V)

Clicking on the Create Vertical Scroll Bar (ALT+C,V) action will generate a
vertical scroll bar control and allow you to attach it to any visible window.
Once the control is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will
invoke the Scroll Bar Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-14.

Scroll bars are controls that take mouse and keyboard input and generate
notification messages to the owner window. Applications typically use scroll
bars to scroll the contents of a client window.

As shown, the Scroll Bar Control Styles dialog window consists of entry fields,
combination boxes, check boxes, and pushbuttons. Some of these controls are
located in group boxes and are noted in the following descriptions:

Name

Each scroll bar control has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the scroll bar in
response to user input. The application responds to these messages by using
this identifier of the scroll bar control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate the
slider portion, and the active/inactive state of the scroll bar control, using
the Name identifier as an argument.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item, or window will be a sibling of the scroll bar
currently being defined.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size, as well as the
foreground, background, and border colors of the scroll bar control.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.5) for information on
defining presentation objects.

Control Styles Group Box

The Control Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set the
style for the current control.

Check boxes are considered to be set to on when a small 'x' appears in the
check box. Each of the control styles will be defined as follows:

  Horizontal Scroll Bar This option is set to off by default. Setting this
                option to on will cause the created Vertical Scroll Bar to
                change appearance to a Horizontal Scroll Bar.
  Thumb Size    This option is set to OFF by default. With this option set to
                on, the scroll bar slider will change its height to reflect the
                percentage of data visible and thus the percentage of the
                scroll bar that the slider should occupy.
  Auto Track    ** currently undefined

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current scroll bar control. Typically these options are
 used for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the scroll bar control will act as an encapsulated group. It
                will receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group style
                remains in effect until the next control with a style such as
                this is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Scroll Bar Control Styles dialog window.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the scroll bar control appearance, Gpf will automatically update the
           control to reflect those changes.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended  Help (ALT+E) in the Scroll bar
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog  window.

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                scroll bar control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this Scroll bar control, as well as
           any children of this scroll bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2.10. PullDown Create Horz Scroll Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Create Horizontal Scroll Bar (ALT+C,H)

Clicking on the Create Horizontal Scroll Bar (ALT+C,H) action will generate a
horizontal scroll bar control and allow you to attach it to any visible window.
Once the control is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will
invoke the Scroll Bar Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-15.

Scroll bars are controls that take mouse and keyboard input and generate
notification messages to the owner window. Applications typically use scroll
bars to scroll the contents of a client window.

As shown, the Scroll Bar Control Styles dialog window consists of entry fields,
combination boxes, check boxes, and pushbuttons. Some of these controls are
located in group boxes and will be noted in the following descriptions:

Name

Each scroll bar control has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the scroll bar in
response to user input. The application responds to these messages by using
this identifier of the scroll bar control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate the
slider portion and the active/inactive state of the scroll bar control by using
the Name identifier as an argument to OS/2 API functions.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the scroll bar
currently being defined.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size as well as the
foreground, background, and border colors of the scroll bar control.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (section 3.10) for information on
defining presentation objects.

Control Styles Group Box

The Control Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set the
style for the current control.

Check boxes are considered to be set to on when a small 'x' appears in the
check box. Each of the control styles are defined as follows:

  Horizontal Scroll Bar This option is set to on by default. Setting this
                option to off will cause the created Horizontal Scroll Bar to
                change appearance to a Vertical Scroll Bar.
  Thumb Size    This option is set to off by default. With this option set to
                on, the scroll bar slider will change its height to reflect the
                percentage of data visible and thus the percentage of the
                scroll bar that the slider should occupy.
  Auto Track    ** currently undefined

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current scroll bar control. Typically these options are
 used for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the scroll bar control will act as an encapsulated group. It
                will receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group style
                remains in effect until the next control with a style such as
                this is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Scroll Bar Control Styles dialog window.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the scroll bar control appearance, Gpf will automatically update the
           control to reflect those changes.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help  (ALT+E) in the Scroll bar
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                scroll bar control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this Scroll bar control, as well as
           any children of this scroll bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. ActionBar Object ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Objects Pull-down Actions

The Objects pull-down actions provide a list of object types (i.e. Icons,
Bitmaps, Fonts, Message Boxes) that can be defined and then incorporated into
your Gpf application definition.

The available Objects pull-down actions will first be described in the
following general overview, followed by a detailed descriptions of each:

PULL-DOWN  : review

Object Message Box Object (ALT+B,M)

The first action available in the Object pull-down is the Message Box Object.
Message boxes provide an easy way to display simple messages without having to
create dialog windows. A message box is easy to use and is appropriately used
when an application requires a clearly defined response to a static message.
Typically message boxes consist of an Icon, message text, and the response
pushbuttons.

An example of typical message box usage would be for prompting the user if they
want to continue with an operation.  The message box itself would have a YES
and NO pushbutton for a response.

Object Presentation Object (ALT+B,P)

A Presentation Object allows you to define any combination of specific font,
foreground, background, or border color as an object. This object can then be
applied when creating other windows or controls when custom presentation is
desired.

For example, consider the use of different font sizes for menu pull-down
actions, dialog window text, or list box items.

Object Icon/Bitmap/Pointers Object (ALT+B,I)

Icons, Bitmaps, or Pointers can also be incorporated into your application
definition in different ways. Once defined as an object, they can be set onto
the window as user drawn buttons, or can be used as the minimize icon.

Object User Function Object (ALT+B,U)

Although Gpf creates a substantial amount of source code, thereby increasing
the productivity of the developer, it cannot generate code specific to the
stratagem of the target application. With this pull-down action, you can define
or even type in source code which will be incorporated into the Gpf definition.

All objects are either accessible from a specific Control Style dialog window
(e.g. Presentation), or via the ACTION button in the same dialog window. For
example, when you use the Create Button pull-down action you can use a
Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object as the button itself, or optionally associate the
button click action with a user defined source code object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.1. PullDown Message Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Message Box Object (ALT+B,M)

Message boxes provide an easy way to display simple messages without creating
dialog windows. A message box is easy to use and is appropriately used when an
application requires a clearly defined response to a static message. Typically,
message boxes consist of an Icon, message text, and the response pushbuttons.

An example of a typical message box would be for querying the user if they want
to continue with an operation.  The message box itself would have a YES and NO
pushbutton for a response.

Clicking on the Object Message Box Object (ALT+B,M) pull-down action will
invoke the Message Box list dialog window.

The Message Dialog window contains a list of all currently defined Message Box
Objects for the current application definition. The following will describe how
to add, edit, or delete Message Box objects:

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Message Dialog window.
 View/Modify Msg Box Click on this button (ALT+V) to display or modify any
                previously defined message box objects. The current selection
                in the Message Dialog list will be chosen for the operation.
                This will invoke the Message Box Object dialog window for
                modification of the selected object. The Message Box Object
                dialog window is described in the following section.
 Add Msg Box    Clicking on the Add Msg Box (ALT+A) button will invoke the
                Message Box Object dialog window for defining the controls of
                the new message box object.

 Message Box Object Dialog Window

 The Message Box Object dialog window contains combination boxes, radio
 buttons, check boxes, multiple line entry fields, and pushbuttons to assist
 you in defining the message box object. Each of the controls will be described
 below. Options located in a group box will be noted.

 Text

 The Text control is a multiple line entry field where you enter the message
 text for the message box. The text entered here is displayed to the user when
 the message box is invoked during application runtime. The multiple line entry
 will automatically word wrap your line of text if it is greater then the width
 of this control.

 Reply Button   The Reply Button is a combination list box with the available
                button combinations that will be displayed with your message
                box. The list of button combinations are standard message box
                responses and should be diverse enough to suit your needs.

           To select a button combination, either click on the selection with
           the mouse, or use the cursor keys to go up and down through the
           list.

 Default Button Group Box

 The Default Button group box contains a number of radio buttons that will
 allow you to define which button of the Reply Button combination will be set
 as the default button. Default buttons are drawn with a thick black border.

 Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one may be selected at one time.

 No 1           This option is set to on by default. This option designates the
                first button in the Reply Button group as the default button.
 No 2           This option is set to off by default. This selection will
                choose the second button in the Reply Button group as the
                default button.
 No 3           This option is set to off by default. This selection will
                choose the third button in the Reply Button group as the
                default button.

 If a default button position is chosen, and the Reply button group does not
 contain as many buttons, the first button will be used as the default button.
 For example, if you choose the YES and NO Reply Button group, and indicate
 that the third button will be the default, then YES will default.

 Icon Group Box

 The Icon group box contains a number of radio buttons which allow you to
 choose an icon to be displayed in the current message box object. When you
 change a selection from this group, an icon representing the selection will be
 displayed in the lower right corner of the Icon group box.

 Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one may be selected at one time.

 No Icon        This option is set to off by default. When selected, the
                defined message box will not have an icon displayed during
                runtime.


 Warning        This option is set to off by default. The Warning icon displays
                an exclamation point ("!") in the defined message box.
 Information    This option is set to on by default. The Information icon
                displays the letter ('i') in the defined message box.
 Error          This option is set to off by default. The Error icon displays a
                stop sign in the defined message box.
 Question       This option is set to off by default. The Question icon
                displays a question mark ("?") in the defined message box.

 Alarm Option Group Box

 The Alarm Option group box contains a number of radio buttons which allow you
 to sound an audible tone upon creation of the message box object. When the
 message box is displayed, during application runtime, the tone will sound.
 Note that certain selections from the Icon group box will set tones of
 different frequencies. These will be identified in the following text.

 No Alarm       With this selection set to on, no tone will be emitted with the
                message box appearance. This option is automatically selected
                when the No Icon option is chosen from the Icon group box.
 Note           This option will cause a high toned beep to sound when the
                message box is displayed. Setting either Information or
                Question icons from the Icon group box will automatically
                select this option.
 Warning        This option will cause a beep (an octave lower in pitch than
                the Note beep) to be emitted when the message box is displayed.
                Setting the Warning icon from the Icon group box will
                automatically select this option.
 Error          This option will cause a beep (an octave lower in pitch than
                the Warning beep) to be emitted when the message box is
                displayed. Setting the Error icon from the Icon group box will
                automatically select this option.

 Modal Group Box

 The Modal group box contains two radio buttons that will set the modal style
 of the message box.

 Appl           This option is set to off by default. When the Appl modal
                option is selected, the message box must be dismissed before
                input is allowed into any other window in the owner
                application. Other applications running under Presentation
                Manager may be accessed without responding to this message box.
 System         This option is set to on by default. The System modal option
                requires that the message box is dismissed before any other
                application running under Presentation Manager can be accessed.

 Options Group Box

 The Options group box contains two check boxes that allow you to set
 additional message box controls.

  Help          This option is set to OFF by default. With this option set to
                on, a "Help" button will be added to the existing Reply Button
                combination. This is to provide the user with extended help
                information on why or what the message box may be indicating.
  Moveable      This option is set to ON by default. This option provides a
                title bar to the message box. This allows the user to move the
                message box around the Presentation Manager desktop by dragging
                it with the mouse.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you have completed any changes in the Message Box
                Object dialog window.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the message box appearance, you will have to run the Animate mode of
           Gpf to view the changes. Refer to the Toolkit Pull-down section for
           information on the Animate function (Chapter 3.10).

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Scroll bar
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your message box. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key or "Help" button when you finally
                run your compiled application.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                message box window.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this message box window, as well as
           any children of the message box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.2. PullDown Presentation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Presentation Object (ALT+B,P)

Clicking on the Object Presentation Object (ALT+B,P) pull-down action will
invoke the Presentation Parameter List dialog window.

A Presentation Object allows you to define any combination of specific font,
foreground, background, or border color, as an object. This object can then be
applied when creating other windows or controls when a custom presentation is
desired.

For example, consider the use of different font sizes for menu pull-down
actions, dialog window text, or list box items.

The Presentation Parameter List dialog window contains a list of all currently
defined Presentation Objects for the current application definition. Once
defined, such objects can be invoked from the 'Presentation' list boxes
contained in most control\dialog definition screens.  The following will
describe adding, editing, or deleting Presentation objects:

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Presentation Parameter List dialog window.
 View/Modify    Click on this button (ALT+V) to display or modify any defined
                presentation objects. The current selection in the dialog list
                will be chosen for this operation. This will invoke the
                Presentation Object Parameters dialog window for modifying the
                selected object. The Presentation Object Parameters dialog
                window is described in the following section.
 Add            Clicking on the Add (ALT+A) button will invoke the Presentation
                Object Parameters dialog window for defining the controls of
                the new presentation object.

 Presentation Object Parameters Dialog Window

 The Presentation Object Parameters dialog window contains combination boxes,
 entry fields, and pushbuttons to assist you in defining the presentation
 object. Each of the controls will be described below:

 Name

 Each presentation object has an identifying name. During the Gpf edit session,
 when you are setting a presentation object to a particular window, menu, or
 other control, this name will appear in the Presentation combination box of
 the particular control setting dialog.

 By default Gpf will insert a Name for you:

           PresParmsx

 where x is the sequential number of the next presentation object to be
 defined. Generally speaking, you should probably edit this field to a more
 useful name, such as "BlueListBox" or "LargeRedFont".

 Font Name Size

 The Font Names Size control is a combination box which will list all the
 different sized fonts that Gpf finds installed on your system. You can select
 a font and font size for the current presentation object from this list.

 To display the list with the mouse, click on the downward pointing arrow to
 the right of the entry field portion of the combination box. While holding the
 mouse button down, drag the highlight selector through the font names in the
 list. Release the mouse button to select the current highlighted font.

 To display the list with the keyboard, first use the TAB key to move the focus
 to the Font Named Size combination box, then press ALT+DOWNARROW. You can then
 use the keyboard cursor keys to move the highlight selector through the list.
 To make a font selection, use the RIGHTARROW key when the highlight selector
 is on the font of your choice.

 As you move the highlight selector, a sample of the font will be displayed in
 both the Font Sample and Overpaint display windows. These windows are located
 at the bottom of the Presentation Object Parameters dialog window. If the list
 of fonts is being displayed you will not be able to view the Overpaint display
 window.

 Background Color

 The Background Color control is a combination box which lists the available
 background colors available for the presentation object.

 To list the available background colors with the mouse or keyboard, follow the
 instructions as explained in the Font Named Size description above.

 As you move the highlight selector, a sample of the background color will be
 displayed in the Font Sample display windows.

 Foreground Color

 The Foreground Color control is a combination box which lists the available
 foreground colors available for the presentation object.

 To list the available foreground colors with the mouse or keyboard, follow the
 instructions as explained in the Font Named Size description above.

 As you move the highlight selector, a sample of the foreground color will be
 displayed in the Font Sample display windows.

 Background Hilite

 Selects the background color attribute for a selected item.

 Foreground Hilite

 Selects the foreground color attribute for a selected item.

 Background Disabled

 Selects the background color attribute for the disabled state of an item.

 Foreground Disabled

 Selects the foreground color attribute for the disabled state of an item.

 Border  Color

 The Border Color control is a combination box which lists the border colors
 available for the presentation object.

 To list the available border colors with the mouse or keyboard, follow the
 instructions as explained in the Font Named Size description above.

 As you move the highlight selector, a sample of the border color will be
 displayed in both the Font Sample display windows.

 Font Sample Display

 The Font Sample Display window is where the presentation object definition can
 be displayed. This enables you to test a multitude of selections before saving
 the Presentation Object definition.

 Overpaint Display

 The Overpaint Display window is where the presentation object definition can
 be displayed. This enables you to test a multitude of selections before saving
 the Presentation Object definition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.3. PullDown Icon Bitmap Pointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Icon/Bitmap/Pointer Objects (ALT+B,I)

Icons, Bitmaps, or Pointers can be incorporated into your application
definition. Once defined as an object they can be set onto the window in the
form of user drawn buttons, static text controls, or even used as the minimize
icon.

Clicking on the Object Icon/Bitmap/Pointer Object (ALT+B,I) pull-down action
will invoke the Icon/Bitmap/Pointer list dialog window.

The Icon/Bitmap/Pointer List dialog window contains a list of all currently
defined Icon/Bitmap/Pointer Objects for the current application definition. The
following will describe adding, editing, or deleting these objects:

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Icon/Bitmap/Pointer List dialog window.
 View/Modify Object Click on this button (ALT+V) to display or modify any
                pre-defined Icon/Bitmap/Pointer objects. The current selection
                in the list will be chosen for this operation. This will invoke
                the Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window for modifying the selected
                object. The Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window is described in
                the following section.
 Add Object     Clicking on the Add Object (ALT+A) button will invoke the
                Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window for defining the controls of
                the new object.

 Icon/Bitmap Object Dialog Window

 The Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window contains radio buttons, entry fields, and
 pushbuttons to assist you in defining the Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object. Each of
 the controls will be described below. Options located in a group box will be
 noted.

 Name

 Each Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object has an identifying name. During the Gpf edit
 session, when you are setting an Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object to a particular
 window, menu, or other control, this name will appear in the
 Icon/Bitmap/Pointer combination box of the particular control setting dialog.

 By default Gpf will insert a Name for you as:

           Iconx

 where x is the sequential number of the next Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object to be
 defined.

 File Name

 The actual file that contains the icon, bitmap, or pointer needs to be
 identified to Gpf. The File Name entry field allows you to type in the name of
 the file created by the Microsoft or IBM Icon Editor, or by a similar bitmap
 creation utility.

 File Type Group Box

 The File Type group box contains a number of radio buttons for indicating what
 type of object is being defined. The options will be described below.

 Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one can be selected at a time.

 Icon           This option is set to on by default. This option indicates that
                you are identifying an Icon drawing as the current object. Gpf
                will search for the file:

           filename.ICO
           where filename is the name of the file as specified in the File Name
           entry field.

 Bitmap         This option is set to off by default. This option indicates
                that you are identifying a Bitmap drawing as the current
                object. Gpf will search for the file:

           filename.BMP
           where filename is the name of the file as specified in the File Name
           entry field.

 Pointer        This option is set to off by default. This option indicates
                that you are identifying a Pointer drawing as the current
                object. Gpf will search for the file:

           filename.PTR
           where filename is the name of the file as specified in the File Name
           entry field.

 Bitmap, pointer, and icon files are closely related.  You may specify an  icon
 to be used as a pointer object and vice-versa. You may also define an icon or
 a pointer as a bitmap object.

 Path

 The Path control is an entry box where you must type in the full path to the
 target icon, bitmap, or pointer file. Gpf will search the path for the above
 described filename and extension.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you have completed the current definition in the
                Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window.

           This will return you to the Icon/Bitmap/Pointer List dialog window,
           where you will be able to view the graphic object as it will appear
           in your application.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button or pressing the ESC key will
                signal Gpf that you want to exit the Icon/Bitmap Object dialog
                window without saving any changes made.

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object.

           Gpf will prompt you with a message to confirm that you want to
           destroy this object, as well as any children of the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.4. PullDown User Function ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object User Function Object (ALT+B,U)

User objects are defined source code statements or references to external
library functions that can be embedded into the Gpf application definition.

This provides a 'safe' method for inserting source code into the definition.
Source code that is entered directly into the Gpf generated source files will
be overwritten the next time a Toolkit Generate action is performed. For a
detailed description of the Gpf source generation function, refer to the
Toolkit Pull-down Actions section (Chapter 3.8) in this document.

Clicking on the Object User Function Object (ALT+B,U) pull-down action will
invoke the User Function Object List dialog window.

The User Object Function List dialog window contains a list of all currently
defined User Objects for the current application definition. The following
section will describe adding, editing, or deleting these objects.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the User
                Object Function List dialog window.
 View/Modify    Click on this button (ALT+V) to display or modify any defined
                user defined source or function objects. The current selection
                in the User Function list will be chosen for this operation.
                This will invoke the User Function Editor dialog window for
                modification of the selected object. The User Function Editor
                dialog window is described in the following section.
 Add            Clicking on the Add (ALT+A) button will invoke the User
                Function Editor dialog window for creating and editing the
                source code function object.

 The User Function Editor Dialog Window

 The User Function Editor dialog window contains an entry field, a multiple
 line entry field, and pushbuttons that allow you to define and type in source
 code comprising the User Function object.

 The User Function editor is not meant to replace high level program editors or
 word processors, but to provide you with a convenient way to insert source
 code functions into your application definition.

 Name

 Each User Function object has an identifying name. During the Gpf edit
 session, when you are applying a User Function object to a particular action,
 you would associate the action with this identifying object name.

 For information on associating User Function objects with actions, refer to
 the Common Dialog Window section (section 3.10).

 User Function Multiple LE Edit Box

 Below the Name entry field is the User Function edit box. This is where you
 can enter either a reference to a pre- existing function, or raw source code
 statements. Whatever statements are entered here will be generated into the
 source code generated from your application definition.

 Modifying any source statements here, as opposed to making changes in the
 actual source file, will insure that Gpf will not overwrite these statements.
 Gpf will overwrite any statements entered directly into the source code file
 because your additions will be unknown to both Gpf and the definition file.
 Ideally, you should save making modifications directly to the source code as
 the last step you perform before actual compilation.

 The edit box itself contains text editing features. Although they are not as
 extensive as a specialized programmers editor, it will sufficiently facilitate
 statement coding. Besides the basic features provided (i.e. Delete, Insert,
 etc...) the following controls are available:

           Cut And Paste - The standard cut and paste operations from the
           Presentation Manager clipboard are supported which allow you to copy
           source code from another file into the Gpf edit box.

           Tabs- Tab characters are supported for the purpose of indenting
           source code statements.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you have completed any additions or changes to the
                User Function Editor dialog window.

 If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to the
 application definition file, you will have to run the Toolkit Generate action
 in Gpf to view the changes that occur in the target source code. Refer to the
 Toolkit Pull-down section (section 3.8) for information on the Generate
 function.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                signal Gpf that you want to dismiss the User Function Editor
                dialog window without retaining any changes you have made.
 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove this
                User Function object.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this object, as well as any
           children of the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3.5. PullDown Find PM Cntrol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Find PM Control  (ALT+B,F)

The Gpf Find PM Control function is a control management utility.  With the
Find PM Control dialog box you can search for or destroy controls (e.g.
Buttons, List Boxes, Icons) defined in windows.

Clicking on the Find PM Control (ALT+B,F) pull-down action will invoke the
Search Object dialog window. All currently visible Gpf application windows will
be dismissed from view when this dialog box is invoked.

Search Object Dialog Window

The Search Object dialog window contains a list of all windows defined in the
current application. For each defined window there is also a list of controls
associated with the window. The following is a description of each of the
available options in the dialog window:

Window List Box

The Window list box contains a list of all windows created in the current
application definition. By default the Main Window, or whatever you may have
named it, will always be listed first in this list.

Selecting a window from this list will cause Gpf to search through and display
any of the controls or objects, associated with the selection in the Object
list box.

Object List Box

The Object list box lists all of the controls and objects associated with the
currently selected window in the Window list box.

 SEARCH         Clicking on the SEARCH button will cause Gpf to search for and
                display the window that contains the currently selected object.
                If found, the window owning the object will be brought to the
                foreground, and the target object will be highlighted.  This
                will also dismiss the Search Object dialog window.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button or pressing the ESC key will
                signal Gpf that you want to dismiss the Search Object dialog
                window.
 DESTROY        Clicking on the DESTROY button (ALT+D), will cause Gpf to
                remove the currently selected object. You will first be
                prompted to confirm that you want to destroy the object as well
                as any children of the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4. ActionBar Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Options Pull-down Actions

The Options pull-down actions allow you to modify the general appearance and
operation of your Gpf session, as well as the current application definition.

The available Options pull-down actions will be given a general overview,
followed by detailed descriptions of each.

PULL-DOWN  : review

Options Grid (ALT+O,G)

Gpf will allow you to set an alignment grid pattern onto windows in your
current Gpf application definition. This option is useful in insuring that
controls within windows are aligned with each other.

Options View Grid (ALT+O,V)

The Options View Grid will make the grid specified in the Option Grid pull-down
visible on the application window.

Options View Tracking (ALT+O,K)

The View Tracking option, when ON, will display a small window in which size
and location coordinates for a selected object appear.

Options Group Move (ALT+O,M)

With the Options Group Move pull-down action, you can move a group of controls
within the application window all at once. This is helpful for keeping the
relative distances between two or more controls constant.

Option Bypass CUA (ALT+O,Y)

When your application deviates from strict CUA compliance, this option will
allow you to suppress the Gpf CUA warning messages.  By default, Gpf will check
each of your control definitions for CUA conformance.

Option Statistics (ALT+O,S)

With this option, Gpf will display a number of statistics about your current
application definition as well as a resource usage graph.

Option Clean Desktop (ALT+O,D)

All the windows in your current application definition can be hidden from view
by selecting this option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4.1. PullDown Grid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options Grid (ALT+O,G)

The Options Grid pull-down action will allow you to set an alignment grid for
windows in the current application definition.  This is useful for insuring
that all controls created are aligned properly within the target window.

Clicking on this option will invoke the Grid Values dialog window.  Please
refer to Figure 3-24 for the following dialog control descriptions:

The Grid Values Dialog Window

The Grid Values dialog windows contain a number of entry fields and pushbuttons
that will allow you to set the grid dimensions for your application windows.
When placed on the window, Gpf will automatically align a control to the
nearest grid coordinates.  This is often referred to in other software packages
as a "snap to" grid.

For the following grid settings, Gpf will allow a maximum dimension size of 5.
All measurements are in relative increments, and the settings entered here will
be reflected in all current application window definitions.

Horizontal (x)

The default is one (1) increment. To have the horizontal grid in your
application window spaced by more than 1 increment, enter the number in this
entry field. The maximum increment is 5.

Vertical (y)

The default is one (1) increment. In this entry field you can set the number of
increments that you would like the vertical grid set to within your application
window.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you have completed any changes in the Grid Values
                dialog window and are ready to exit.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button or pressing the ESC key will
                signal Gpf that you want to exit the Grid Values dialog window
                without saving any changes made.
 HELP           This is the standard gateway button, permitting entry into the
                full HELP system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4.2. PullDown View Grid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options View Grid (ALT+O,V)

The Options View Grid pull-down will cause the grid line pattern in your
application windows to be displayed. The increments defined in the Grid Values
dialog window are used for setting the grid width and height.

Clicking on the View Grid pull-down action does not invoke a dialog window, but
sets the viewing state to on or off. The state of the Grid View pull-down will
be indicated by a check mark for on, or no check mark for off.

When the View Grid pull-down action state is on, all of the windows in your
application definition will display the grid pattern.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4.3. PullDown View Tracking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Options View Tracking (ALT+O,K)

If checked, the option is active. A small window will display, showing two sets
of data for a selected object:

 o Xxxxx, Yyyy: the lower left corner coordinates of the object, as measured in
   absolute coordinates of the parent object. For objects owned by the DESKTOP,
   the (0,0) point is the lower left screen corner, with positive Y in the
   vertical direction, positive X in the horizontal. All other objects are
   measured with respect to the lower left corner of their parent, also the
   (0,0) origin.
 o CXxxxx, CYyyyy: the current size of the object, measured with respect to its
   own lower left corner. Positive directions are as above.

 This pulldown option is a toggle, and is selected\de-selected with each
 successive menu invocation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4.4. PullDown Group Move ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Option Group Move (ALT+O,G)

With the Options Group Move pull-down action (ALT+O,G), you can move an entire
group of controls within the application window. This is helpful for keeping
the relative distance between two or more controls constant.

Clicking on the Group Move pull-down action does not invoke a dialog window,
but instead sets the Group Move state to on or off. The state of the Group Move
pull-down will be indicated by a check mark for on, or no check mark for off.

Setting and Moving a Group

Click on the Group Move pull-down action to set the state to on. Once this is
done, the first control you select in the window will be the leading object for
the group. After selecting the leading object, click on the other controls you
would like included in this group move.

When you have completed forming the group, select the group leading object and
move it on the window by holding down the mouse button and dragging the object.
When you release the leading object, all members of the group will reposition
themselves, maintaining the same relative distances that existed prior to the
move.

Click on the Group Move pull-down again to set the state to off.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4.5. PullDown Bypass CUA ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Option Bypass CUA (ALT+O,Y)

By default, Gpf will check each of your control definitions for CUA compliance.
If Gpf finds that you have deviated from the CUA guidelines while creating or
modifying an object or control in your application definition, a warning
message box will be displayed informing you of impending deviation.

Gpf will allow you to selectively bypass CUA compliance during the instances
when it detects an errant control. A message box will appear requesting and
answer for bypassing this control only.

Through the Option Bypass CUA pull-down action, Gpf will allow you to set CUA
checking off for the entire Gpf session.

Clicking on the Bypass CUA pull-down action (ALT+O,Y) does not invoke a dialog
window, but sets the bypass state to on or off. The state of the Bypass CUA
pull-down will be indicated by a check mark for on, or no check mark if CUA
checking is in effect.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4.6. PullDown Statistics ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Option Statistics (ALT+O,S)

Each time you create a window, control, or object, you are using some of the
available Presentation Manager resources. Under versions 1.1 and 1.2 of OS/2
Presentation Manager, there are a limited number of resources available.

Gpf keeps track of how many resources of each type are being used by your
current application definition. With the Option Statistics (ALT+O,S) pull-down,
you can view the current state of resource consumption.

Clicking on the Option Statistics pull-down action (ALT+O,S) will invoke the
Statistics Dialog Window. This dialog window, and the resource indicators are
described as follows:

Statistics Dialog Window

The Statistics dialog window is a read-only group of identifiers which indicate
the current state of application definition resource usage. As a read-only
dialog window, you will not be able to modify any of the values displayed. This
dialog is for informational purposes only. Here are each of the identifiers:

 Window         This indicates the number of windows or dialog windows
                currently defined for the application. By default this value
                will be 1 for the main window.
 Control        This indicates the number of controls (i.e. Buttons, Static
                Text, List Boxes, etc.) currently defined in the application.
 Menu           This indicates the total number of menu elements defined for
                the current application. Menu elements include both the high
                level menu bar items, as well as any pull-down or submenu
                items.
 Help           This indicates the number of Entry Help descriptions defined
                for the current application.
 SQL            This indicates the number of SQL associations defined in the
                current application. A SQL association is where you associate a
                control (e.g. List Box, Combobox, Entry Field) with an SQL
                table.column name.
 Action         This indicates how many actions have been defined for any
                existing windows, menus, or other controls in the current
                application.
 Source         This field indicates the number of source code files that have
                been identified in the current application. When you create a
                new window or dialog window, you have the option of having the
                source code generated to a file different than the main source
                file.
 Threads        This indicates the number of threads that have been identified
                in the current application. When you create a new window or
                dialog window, you have the option of creating a separate
                thread of execution for each one.
 Icon Bitmap    This indicates the number of Icon/Bitmap/Pointer objects that
                have been defined in the current application.
 Message Box    This field indicates the number of Message Box objects that
                have been defined in the current application.
 Presentation   This field indicates the number of Presentation objects that
                have been defined in the current application.
 User Text      This field indicates the number of User Function objects that
                have been defined in the current application.
 Resource Usage Graphic The Resource Usage graphic is a bar graph showing the
                ratio of the amount of resources used to the total number of
                resources available.

 For OS/2 1.2 Extended Edition, the total number of available resources is set
 at 8192. The resource usage field is calculated by:

           THE_NUMBER_OF_USED_RESOURCE / 8192

 where THE_NUMBER_OF_USED_RESOURCE is the sum total of the resource indicators.

 The Resource Usage graph itself is broken into 25% quarters, where the current
 resource usage will be graphed.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you are through looking at the Statistics dialog
                window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4.7. PullDown Clean Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Option Clean Desktop (ALT+O,D)

The Clean Desktop pull-down action will hide all visible windows in the current
application. To display a hidden window, use the Window pull-down to select the
desired window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.5. ActionBar Window ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Window Pull-down Actions

The Window pull-down action allows you to selectively choose which application
windows or dialog windows are visible on the screen.

PULL-DOWN  : review

The Window pull-down action (ALT+W) is unlike the other pull-downs in Gpf. The
pull-down actions, in the Window pull-down, are dynamically made up of the
windows, or dialog windows, defined in the current application.

With the Window pull-down you can select a window, from the pull-down list, to
either display or hide from view. Windows that are currently visible on the
desktop are marked with a check next to the window name, those windows without
the check mark are hidden.

The window names used in the following example are the default names assigned
to the windows by Gpf.

Assume that your current application contains two windows: MainWindow and
Window1. When you click on the Window pull-down, or select it with (ALT+W), Gpf
will display the list directly below the menu item.

Figure 3.26 indicates that the MainWindow is visible on the screen, as can be
seen by the check mark next to the name of the window, and hopefully the window
itself is visible on the screen. Window1, on the other hand, is hidden as
indicated by the lack of the check mark. Click on Window1 in the Window
pull-down to bring it to the foreground as well.

When displaying or hiding windows with the Window pull-down, you must remember
that if you select a window to make it visible, and the window parent is
invisible, then it too will be brought to the foreground. Furthermore, hiding
the parent window of one or more children windows, will hide the children as
well.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.6. ActionBar Toolkit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Toolkit Pull-down Actions

The Toolkit Pull-down Overview

The Toolkit pull-down provides a set of actions which allow you to test, run a
real time interpreter test, generate source code, or compile the current Gpf
definition.

As with other Gpf pull-down actions, you can either select the action with a
mouse click, or by using the (ALT+X,Y) keyboard combination, where X is the
underlined letter of the menu bar identifier and Y is the underlined letter of
the pull-down action that you want to execute. Each of the Toolkit pull-down
actions will be generally described, and then will be covered in detail in the
order in which it they appear on the pull-down.

Toolkit Animator (ALT+T,A)

The Toolkit Animate pull-down action will cause Gpf to execute the Gpf
real-time interpreter for your current application definition. This is a useful
for doing a high level test of actions, menus, etc., before generating the
actual source code.

Toolkit Generate (ALT+T,G)

The Toolkit Generate pull-down action will cause Gpf to invoke the Gpf Source
Generator for your current application definition. Header files, source files,
resource statements, and an application make file will be generated in the
current working directory.

Clicking on this option will:

           - invoke a verification window, asking if you wish to save the
           current definition.  You must answer YES in order to proceed.
           - open an OS/2 session and run GPFGENER, the utility which
           translates the .ORC file into the various sources and helper files.
           - close your definition file prior to running GPFGENER.  This is
           done in order that GPFEDIT can release all locks on the current
           definition. This implies that you will need to re-open the file when
           the generate phase is finished; type EXIT in the OS/2 window and you
           return to the initial GPFEDIT screen as though just invoked.

 Toolkit Compile (ALT+T,C)

 The Toolkit Compile pull-down action is a two step process. The first step is
 the generation of the source code for the current application, the second is
 the running of the make file and creation of the application executable file.

 Clicking on this option will cause essentially the same sequence of steps as
 invoking the Generator, including the closing of all current files. You will
 need to re-load (Open) the working file once the compilation phases are
 complete.

 Toolkit Test (ALT+T,T)

 The Toolkit Test pull-down action will allow you to perform rudimentary
 testing of the current application definition. Certain functions within your
 application will not be tested, such as SQL calls, with this option. For a
 more thorough testing of the application, you may consider the Toolkit Animate
 pull-down action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.6.1. PullDown Animator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Toolkit Animator (ALT+T,A)

Clicking on the Toolkit Animator pull-down action will cause Gpf to execute the
Gpf real-time interpreter (Animator) for your current application definition.
When the Animator is invoked, the Gpf edit window will minimize itself to an
icon at the bottom of the Presentation Manager desktop.

You are still able to use the Gpf editor while running the Animator, although
any changes made to the application definition will not be reflected in the
Animator. This is useful if you consider the Animator process to be a debugging
step. If you identify a problem, or an incorrect action, you can immediately
switch to the Gpf editor to make your modifications.

The Animator is actually a separate executable file, GPFRUN.EXE, that uses the
current definition in memory as a source for the Animator displays and actions.
For information on using GPFRUN.EXE with stored Gpf definition files, refer to
the Gpf Utility Files section of this documentation.

The Animator runs the application as you have defined it, any actions that
display or hide other windows, message boxes, fonts, etc., will work as
expected. If actions occur that were not expected the Animator is simply
proving itself as a debugging tool; it only executes what you have defined to
execute. There are a few exceptions to this rule, as described below.

Restrictions with Animation

Although the Animator is intended to run your current definition as it would be
run as the final stand alone application executable, there are a few
restrictions that apply.

Help Functions

Any help text that has been defined for windows, menu items and pull-downs,
controls, etc., will not be run from within the Animator. Currently the only
way to test the help actions is by running a compiled version of the
definition.

Informational messages, on the other hand, will be displayed during the
Animator run.

User Function Objects

If you have associated a User Function object as an action to a window control,
menu item, etc., the Animator will not run the object. Currently the only way
to test the User Function object is by running a compiled version of the
definition.

Exiting The Animator

When you have completed your testing of the application, you can exit the
Animator. This can be done in a number of ways:

Specify an Exit Menu Option

The standard main window creates a menu bar by default. The menu bar consists
of a File and Help pull-down. The File pull-down contains an Exit pull-down
action that has a Quit Application associated with its action. If you run the
Animator and click on the Exit pull-down action, you will signal the Animator
to stop running the application and exit the system.

If you have changed the standard menu bar it is a good idea to have an Exit
action located somewhere in your application definition.

Using the System Menu Close Option

The standard main window creates a System Menu. This menu is actually hidden in
the top left corner of the main window, underneath the bitmap that is visible.
This menu contains a Close pull-down action that, when clicked or selected with
the keyboard, will signal the Animator to stop running the application and exit
the system.

Worst Case

If your application does not contain an Exit option, and you have indicated not
to display the System Menu, you can still exit the Animator.

The OS/2 Presentation Manager contains the Task Manager. This is a list box of
applications that are currently running on the system. From this list box you
can either Select and application to 'jump' to, or end  and remove a given
application from the system.

You can use the Task Manager to exit the Animator by highlighting the
application name in the Task Manager list box and choosing the End Task option.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.6.2. PullDown Generator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Toolkit Generate (ALT+T,G)

The Toolkit Generate pull-down action will cause Gpf to invoke the Gpf Source
Generator for your current application definition.

Before Gpf actually runs the Generator, you will be prompted to save the
current application definition to its definition file. This happens regardless
of any changes made, or not made, to the current application. Unlike the
Animator, the Generator works with the application file, not the in memory
definition.

Unlike the Animator pull-down action, the Generator causes the Gpf editor to
close the current application definition file, and remove it from memory. This
is because the Gpf editor locks the definition file while in memory and other
applications cannot access the file.

This Generator is actually a separate executable file, GPFGENER.EXE, that will
use the definition file as a source for creating the source, header, resource,
and make files for the application. For information on using GPFGENER.EXE with
stored Gpf definition files, refer to the Gpf Utility Files section of this
documentation.

Generator Processing Steps

The Generator actually performs two steps when generating the source for the
application definition; generation and precompilation.

Generation

The Generation step for source file generation pre-allocates the files that
will eventually be used in compiling and linking your application. If the files
created in this step are already present when you run the Generator, they will
be overwritten. This insures that you will be compiling the most up to date
version of your application. The files generated during this step will be
described. For the file descriptions, filename is the name of the source file
indicated in the Program Properties dialog window for your application
definition.

 File Name      Description

 FILENAME.C or FILENAME.SQC These files are where the actual source statements
                are written to. If your application definition does not contain
                any SQL Database associations the filename extension will be
                ".C", else the ".SQC" extension is used. If you have identified
                multiple source files in your application definition, the Gpf
                Generator will create a 'C' or 'SQC' file for each.
 FILENAME.DEF    This file is the application definition file. A definition
                file is read during the linkage phase of the application build.
                This file contains information about the operating system
                environment, stack sizes, and callable entry points for your
                application. Consult your compiler, or linker, documentation
                for more information on application definition files.
 FILENAME.MAK   This file is the make file definition that automates the
                process of compiling and linking your application. Make files
                typically contain rules and definitions that control the
                compiling and linking stages of an application creation.
                Consult the OS/2 toolkit documentation for more information on
                make files.
 FILENAME.CMD   This file contains the OS/2 command file statements that
                further automate the creation of the application. Statements
                within this file will setup any needed environmental
                information as well as invoking the proper make executable for
                the generated make file. Consult the OS/2 Command reference for
                more information on command files.
 FILENAME.SQH   This file contains a list of 'C' storage definitions for each
                field in the accessed SQL database table. The storage
                definitions are derived from the SQL stored table definitions.
 FILENAME.EXT   This file contains a list of shared function prototypes and
                external global definitions.
 FILENAME.RC    This file contains the resource definitions (e.g. windows,
                menus, buttons, etc. ) that are used by your application. This
                file is processed by the resource compiler found in the OS/2
                toolkit utilities.
 FILENAME.IDS   This file contains a list of defines for names, as defined in
                the Name field of the Control dialog windows for each window
                and control. The identifiers themselves are actually numeric
                values, the define allows you to reference these  identifiers
                by name.
 FILENAME.IPF   This file contains the help text, as defined in the Entry
                Extended Help fields during the application definition. The
                file is processed by the help compiler found in the OS/2
                toolkit utilities.

                Precompilation

 The precompilation step for the Generator does not create any additional
 files, but uses the existing files for filling in respective information.

 The precompilation step generates the actual 'C' source statements, and
 optionally SQL preprocess statements, as found in the application definition
 file. As well as source statements, any id definitions, resource statements,
 and User Defined objects are created as well.

 Finally, the Generator places the relevant make and command file statements in
 their respective files as listed above.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.6.3. PullDown Compiler ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Toolkit Compiler (ALT+T,C)

You can compile an application definition without exiting the Gpf edit session,
or opening another OS/2 window or full screen session.

When you click on the Toolkit Compiler (ALT+T,C) action pull-down, Gpf will
search for the FILENAME.CMD file to execute, where FILENAME.CMD is the name of
the OS/2 command file generated with the Toolkit Generator pull-down action.

The command file is loaded and executed. Statements within the command file set
the appropriate environmental path and directory statements, as well as
invoking the make utility for the FILENAME.MAK file. It is important to
remember that if you change your application definition during the Gpf edit
session, you should regenerate the source files with the Toolkit Generator
pull-down action before compiling.

During the 'building' of your application ( i.e. compilation, linking, etc. )
you are able to view the progress with an OS/2 session window. Any errors that
the make utility, compiler, linker, resource compiler, or help compiler
generate will be displayed in this window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.6.4. PullDown Test ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Toolkit Test (ALT+T,T)

The Toolkit Test pull-down action will allow you to perform rudimentary testing
of the current application definition.

When this action is selected, Gpf will disable all of its functions from use.
Unlike the Animator step, you are unable to modify any of the definitions
during the Test step. This is because the Gpf editor is running your
application definition.

Restrictions with Toolkit Test

The Toolkit Test is far more restrictive in the actions allowed during the test
mode. In general, all actions associated with a window and control are
disabled.

During test mode, you can test the effect of clicking on menu lists, buttons,
and controls.

Exiting Toolkit Test

To exit test mode, click on the Toolkit Test pull-down action (ALT+T,T).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7. ActionBar Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help Pull-down Actions

The Help Pull-down Overview

The Help Pull-down provides you with online help information about the Gpf
editor. This pull-down is specific to Gpf, not the application being defined
within the editor itself.

Help is always available. You can obtain help at any time by pressing the F1
key.

When you request help, a help window is displayed. The kind of help you get is
determined by what you  selected before you requested help or what task you
were doing when you requested help. If the selection  cursor is on a menu bar
choice, a pull-down action choice,  or on a field in a dialog window, the help
will specifically relate to that choice or field.

To get help for a menu bar choice or a pull-down action choice, highlight the
choice and then press F1.

To get help for a field, click on the field (or press the Tab key to move the
cursor to the field). Then, press  F1. If the cursor is already on a field when
the dialog window is displayed, simply press F1 to obtain help on that field.

Within some help windows, certain words or phrases are highlighted. To obtain
additional information about a word or phrase, double-click on the word or
phrase.  (Or press the Tab key until the cursor is on the word or phrase, and
then press ENTER ).

The associated Help pull-down actions for the Help Pull-down includes these
additional help choices:

           Extended help
           Keys help
           Help index

 Each of the available actions will be briefly described.

 Extended Help (ALT+H,E)

 Extended help provides general information about the Gpf Editor.

 Click on Extended help (ALT+H,E) from the Help pull-down. (Or select Extended
 help from the pull-down and press ENTER) You can also press the F2 key from
 within a Help window.

 Keys Help (ALT+H,K)

 Keys help displays a list of key assignments for the application you are
 using.

 Click on Keys help (ALT+H,K) from the Help pull-down. (Or select Keys help
 from the pull-down and press ENTER ) You can also press the F9 key from within
 a Help window.

 Help Index (ALT+H,I)

 Help index provides a list of help topics. You can also press the F11 key from
 within a Help window.

 To search the index list, do the following:

           Click on Search from the Services pull-down. (Or select Search from
           the pull-down and press the ENTER key.)
           Type the word or phrase to be searched for in the Search for field.
           Click on the Index radio button (or press the Tab key to move the
           cursor to the radio button).
           Click on Search (or select it and press the ENTER key.)

 Help Contents (ALT+H,C)

 When invoked, the Help Contents will display a list of topics which discuss
 various features of the Gpf application.

 To search the contents list, do the following:

           Click on Search from the Services pull-down. (Or select Search from
           the pull-down and press the ENTER key.)
           Type the word or phrase to be searched for in the Search for field.
           Click on the Index radio button (or press the Tab key to move the
           cursor to the radio button).
           Click on Search (or select it and press the ENTER key.)

 Help About (ALT+H,A)

 Clicking on Help About (ALT+H,A) will display the Gpf about dialog box. This
 dialog box is used to view general information about the author and copyright
 information.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Dlg Action On ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This screen lists the possible actions the current control is capable of
performing or reacting to.

Select one of the listed items and press the View\Modify... key to enter the
definition screens.

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. Dlg Action On ListBox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This listbox contains the list of actions which the current object reacts to
(or can perform.)  Select the action for which you want to define some
processing, then press on the View\Modify.. key.  The subsequent dialogue
allows you to define and enter as many procedures as required by your
application for the activation of the control in the currently defined (by this
screen) action.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. Dlg Action on OK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. Dlg Action On Modify ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Dlg Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Create Button (ALT+C,B)

Clicking on the Create Button (ALT+C,B) action will generate a push button
control item and allow you to attach it to any visible window. Once the control
is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will invoke the Button
Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-9.

There are four main types of buttons: push buttons, radio buttons, check boxes,
and three-state check boxes. The appearance and behavior of button controls is
determined by the style of the button. There is also the user defined, or
'owner drawn' button which allows you to place a bitmap or icon on the window
which will send notification messages to the application. The owner of the user
defined button is responsible for the appearance of the button.

As shown, the Button Control Styles dialog window consists of a number of entry
fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and push buttons. Some
of these controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the following
descriptions:

Name

Each button control has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the button in
response to user input, either from the mouse or the keyboard. The application
responds to these messages by using the identifier of the button control.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays, and allows you to
choose which control item or window is a sibling of the item currently being
defined.

Text

The Text control is an entry field where you specify the text that will appear
inside, or next to, the button. Typically you can set a mnemonic character in
the text so the user can select the button with the keyboard. For example, a
button with the following text:

           ~Select Me

 would allow the user to select the button by pressing ALT+S. Use the tilde
 character (~) to identify the mnemonic character.

 Presentation

 The Presentation control is a combination box which displays, and allows you
 to choose, a presentation object for setting the font size, foreground and
 background, and border colors of the button control.

 The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
 Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.5) for information on
 defining presentation objects.

 Control Styles Group Box

 The Control Styles group box contains a number of radio buttons that define
 what type of button the newly created control is.

 Radio buttons in a group box are mutually exclusive; only one can be set to on
 in the group at one time. Each of the control styles will be described:

 Radio Button   This option is set to off by default. Radio buttons are
                typically used in a mutually exclusive group. The application
                is responsible for responding to state changes (i.e. button
                clicked messages) for this button as well as other radio
                buttons within the group.
 Auto Radio Button This option is set to off by default. This style is similar
                to the Radio Button, but the state changes are handled
                automatically by the system. The state of the button can be
                checked with OS/2 Presentation Manager API calls.
 Check Box      This option is set to off by default. A check box is a small
                square that is empty when it is not selected, and contains a
                small 'x' when selected. The text for the check box is
                displayed to the right of the small square. As with the Radio
                Button, the owner application window is responsible for
                changing the check box state.
 Auto Check Box This option is set to off by default. This style is similar to
                the Check Box, but the state changes are handled automatically
                by the system. As with auto radio buttons, the state of the
                check box can be queried and set with OS/2 Presentation Manager
                API calls.
 3 State        This option is set to off by default. The 3 State check box
                extends the normal check box, except that it toggles between
                selected, unselected, and halftone states. The owner
                application window is responsible for changing the 3 state
                appearance.
 Auto 3 State   This option is set to off by default. The Auto 3 State check
                box is similar to the 3 State check box, but the state changes
                are handled automatically by the system. There are API calls
                available for checking the current status of the Auto 3 State.
 Push Button    This option is set to on by default. The Push Button is the
                classic button style. When the user clicks on this button, or
                optionally uses a mnemonic key, the button sends notification
                messages to the owner window.
 User Button    This option is set to off by default. The User Button can be a
                bitmap object drawn by the user. As with the normal push
                button, notification messages are sent to the owner window when
                the button is selected. When this option is selected, both the
                Normal and Hilited Bitmap combination boxes are enabled. You
                can select a defined bitmap object for both the normal and
                highlighted state of the button. Bitmaps must have been
                identified as an object to appear in the combination box list.
                Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.5) for
                information on defining bitmap objects.

 Button Options Group Box

 The Button Options group box contains a number of check boxes that define the
 operational characteristics of the button. This group box is only enabled when
 the Push Button or User Button styles have been chosen.

 Being check boxes, Gpf will generate the option if set to ON, and you may
 combine more than one option per button. Each of the options will be described
 below:

  Default       This option is set to off by default. A button with this style
                is outlined with a heavy black border. A user can select this
                button by pressing the ENTER key.
  No Focus      This option is set to off by default. A button with this style
                does not receive the focus, even when selected.
  No Cursor     This option is set to off by default. With this style set the
                user will be unable to move the focus to this button using the
                keyboard cursor keys.
  No Border     This option is set to off by default. With this style set, the
                button is drawn without a border, in effect removing the
                'button' look and feel. These buttons, when selected, will
                still send notification messages to the application.

 Alias Group Box

 Presentation Manager maintains certain default notification messages for
 pushbuttons. The Alias group box allows you to define one of these for the
 current button control.

 Being radio buttons, these options are mutually exclusive. Note that Aliasing
 is only allowed for buttons with the Push Button style set.

 None           This option is set to on by default. The currently defined
                button does not send an aliased notification message to the
                application window. In this case, the message sent is the
                contents of the name entered in the Name entry field.
 Ok             This option is set to off by default. With this button option,
                the defined button will send the application window a DID_OK
                message.
 Cancel         This option is set to off by default. With this button option,
                the defined button will send the application window a
                DID_CANCEL message.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current button control. Typically these options are
 used for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to off by default. With this style set to
                on, the button control will act as the first member of a number
                of other buttons in a group. It will receive the keyboard or
                mouse focus. The group style remains in effect until the next
                control with a style such as this is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Button Control Styles dialog window and will save your changes.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the button control appearance, Gpf will automatically update the
           button to reflect those changes.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the button control while in the
           Button Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes and
           restore the original settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Static
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions desired for the button control item when the user
                selects it. The Action On dialog window allows you to define
                processing for the following user action:

           Click- This user action occurs when the user clicks on the button
           control item with the mouse, or invokes the button control item with
           an accelerator key. You can define the action associated with the
           button control item selection from a list of pre-defined actions, or
           with user developed source code.
           The click option is listed in the Action On dialog window. To select
           an action from the list box, either click on the target with the
           mouse, or use the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection is to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10).

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                button control item.

           When you select this option, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this button, as well as any
           children of this control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. Dlg Button Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Name

Each button control has an identifying name. During program execution,  the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the button in
response to user input, either from the mouse or the keyboard. The application
responds to these messages by using the identifier of the button control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. Dlg Button Order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays, and allows  you to
choose which control item or window is a sibling of the item currently being
defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. Dlg Button Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Text

The Text control is an entry field where you specify the text that will appear
inside, or next to, the button. Typically you can set a mnemonic character in
the text so the user can select the button with the keyboard. For example, a
button with the following text:

           ~Select Me

 would allow the user to select the button by pressing ALT+S. Use the tilde
 character (~) to identify the mnemonic character.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. AUTORADIOBUTTON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button controls have these basic window styles:

BS_AUTORADIOBUTTON

 A radio button is similar to a check box, but is typically used in groups in
which only one button at a time is checked.  When a radio button is clicked or
a cursor key is pressed to move within the group, it notifies its owner window.
It is then up to the owner window to check the clicked radio button and uncheck
all the rest, if necessary.

 When clicked, an automatic radio button automatically checks itself and
unchecks all other radio buttons in the same group.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. AUTOCHECKBOX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button controls have these basic window styles:

BS_AUTOCHECKBOX

 A checkbox is a small square with a character string to the right.  If it is
checked, a small black box appears inside the small square. When the box or
string is clicked,by clicking on it with the pointing device or pressing the
keyboard spacebar when it is active, the checkbox changes state and the parent
window is notified.

 An automatic check box automatically toggles its state whenever the user
clicks on it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. AUTO3STATE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button controls have these basic window styles:

BS_AUTO3STATE

 A three-state check box is identical to a check box control except that its
check box can be half-toned as well as the box being checked or unchecked.

 An automatic three-state check box automatically toggles its state when the
user clicks on it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. PUSHBUTTON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button controls have these basic window styles:

BS_PUSHBUTTON

 A pushbutton is a box that contains a string. When a button is pushed, by
clicking the pointing device on it or pressing the SPACEBAR when it is active,
the parent  window is notified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.8. RADIOBUTTON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button controls have these basic window styles:

BS_RADIOBUTTON

 A radio button is similar to a check box, but is typically used in groups in
which only one button at a time is checked.  When a radio button is clicked or
a cursor key is pressed to move within the group, it notifies its owner window.
It is then up to the owner window to check the clicked radio button and uncheck
all the rest, if necessary.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.9. CHECKBOX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button controls have these basic window styles:

BS_CHECKBOX

 A checkbox is a small square with a character string to the right.  If it is
checked, a small black box appears inside the small square. When the box or
string is clicked, by clicking on it with the pointing device or pressing the
keyboard spacebar when it is active, the checkbox changes state and the parent
window is notified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.10. 3STATE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button controls have these basic window styles:

BS_3STATE

 A three-state check box is identical to a check box control except that its
check box can be half-toned as well as the box being checked or unchecked.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.11. USERBUTTON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Button controls have these basic window styles:

BS_USERBUTTON

 This is an application-definable button.  The owner window of this style
control receives the additional button style BN_PAINT.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.12. Dlg Button PresParams ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentations

The presentation parameter is a drop down list from which you select the visual
attributes to assign to the current object.

Presentations behave similarly to Desktop Publisher 'tags'; once defined they
can be re-used, i.e., attached to as many controls as you desire.

A new application will only have the choice NULL, which assigns system defaults
to the current object.

Note:  There are no pre-defined presentations supplied. You must create one or
       more presentations through the Object- Presentation menu from the main
       editor Action Bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.13. BITMAP1 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For User Button styles this field selects the default (button not pressed)
image for the button.

Note:  The list contains entries if and only if you have registered bitmaps for
       this application. This is accomplished via the Object-
       Icon/Bitmap/Pointer main menu Action Bar, with file type set to .BMP

 Note:  If an entry exists in the text field it WILL appear in the center of
        your bitmap. This may or may not be desirable. Simply delete the text
        entry if need be.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.14. BITMAP2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

For User Button styles this field selects the default (button not pressed)
image for the button.

Note:  The list contains entries if and only if you have registered bitmaps for
       this application. This is accomplished via the Object-
       Icon/Bitmap/Pointer main menu Action Bar, with file type set to .BMP

 Note:  If an entry exists in the text field it WILL appear in the center of
        your bitmap. This may or may not be desirable. Simply delete the text
        entry if need be.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.15. DEFAULT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This style can be ORed with the BS_PUSHBUTTON and BS_USERBUTTON styles to give
the BS_DEFPUSHBUTTON and BS_DEFUSERBUTTON styles:

BS_DEFAULT

  A BS_DEFAULT pushbutton is one with a thick border box.  It has the same
properties as a pushbutton. In addition, the user may press a BS_DEFAULT
pushbutton by pressing the RETURN or ENTER key. The intention is the same for
userbuttons, but the appearance of a BS_DEFAULT userbutton is
application-defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.16. NOPOINTERFOCUS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This style can be ORed with any of the basic button styles:

BS_NOPOINTERFOCUS

 Buttons with this style do not set the focus to themselves when clicked with
the pointing device. This enables the cursor to stay on a control for which
information is required, rather than moving to the button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.17. NOCURSORSELECT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This style can be ORed with the BS_AUTORADIOBUTTON style:

BS_NOCURSORSELECT

The radio button does not select itself when given the focus as the result of
an arrow key or tab key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.18. NOBORDER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These styles can be ORed with the BS_PUSHBUTTON style:

BS_NOBORDER

 The pushbutton is displayed without a border drawn around it. There is no
other change in the pushbutton's operation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.19. Dlg Button Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_GROUP

 This identifies the dialog items that make up a `group'.

 This style should be specified on the first window of any group. Subsequent
windows of the group must not have this style. The windows of the group must be
adjacent siblings. This can be done by listing the windows consecutively in
templates or by inserting each new window in the group behind the previous one
(WinCreateWindow).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.20. Dlg Button TabStop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_TABSTOP

 This identifies a dialog item as one to which the operator can TAB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.21. DIDNONE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This option is set to on by default. The currently defined button does not send
an aliased notification message to the application window. In this case, the
message sent is the contents of the name entered in the Name entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.22. DIDOK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Send DID_OK message when this button is pressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.23. DIDCANCEL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Send DID_CANCEL message when this button is pressed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.24. Dlg Button Ok ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Button Control Styles dialog window and will save your changes.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the button control appearance, Gpf will automatically update the
           button to reflect those changes.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.25. Dlg Button Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the button control while in the
           Button Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes and
           restore the original settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.26. Dlg Button EntryHelp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Static
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.27. Dlg Button Action ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions desired for the button control item when the user
                selects it. The Action On dialog window allows you to define
                processing for the following user action:

           Click- This user action occurs when the user clicks on the button
           control item with the mouse, or invokes the button control item with
           an accelerator key. You can define the action associated with the
           button control item selection from a list of pre-defined actions, or
           with user developed source code.
           The click option is listed in the Action On dialog window. To select
           an action from the list box, either click on the target with the
           mouse, or use the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection is to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.28. Dlg Button Destroy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                button control item.

           When you select this option, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this button, as well as any
           children of this control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Dlg Combo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Create Combobox (ALT+C,C)

Clicking on the Create Combobox (ALT+C,C) action will generate a combination
box control and allow you to attach it to any visible window. Once the control
is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will invoke the Combobox
Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-11.

Combobox controls are combination boxes. A combination box is two controls in
one: an entry field and a list box. Combination boxes let the user enter data
by typing in the entry field or by choosing from a list in the list box.

As shown, the Combobox Control Styles dialog window consists of entry fields,
combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and pushbuttons. Some of these
controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the following
descriptions:

Name

Each combobox has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the combination
box in response to user input. The application responds to these messages by
using this identifier of the combination box control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate
items in a combination box using the Name identifier as an argument.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the Combobox currently
being defined.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size and the foreground,
background and border colors of the Combobox items.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section for information on defining
presentation objects.

Control Styles Group Box

The Control Styles group box contains a number of radio buttons that define the
Combobox style.

Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one option can be set at one time.
Each of the combination box options will be described below:

 Simple         This option is set to OFF by default. A simple combination box
                displays its list box. The user can enter and edit text in the
                entry field or choose items from the list box.
 Drop Down      This option is set to OFF by default. A simple drop down
                combination box displays its list box only if the user clicks
                the drop down button at the right end of the entry field. It
                hides the list box when the user clicks the drop down button a
                second time. In a drop down combination box, the user can enter
                and edit text in the entry field or choose items from the list
                box.
 Drop Down List This option is set to ON by default. A drop down list
                combination box is similar to the simple drop down combination
                box, but the user cannot enter or edit text in the entry field.
                The user can only choose items from the list box.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current Combobox control. Typically these options are
 used for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the Combobox control will act as an encapsulated group. It will
                receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group style remains in
                effect until the next control with a style such as this is
                found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Combobox Control Styles dialog window.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the Combobox control while in
           the Combobox Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the
           changes and restore the original settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Static
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control with
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the Combobox control item when the user selects it.
                The Action On dialog window allows you to define processing for
                the following user actions:

           Click - Presentation Manager generates a notification message to the
           owning window when the user clicks on any item in the list box.
           Double Click - Double clicking on an item in a Combobox will cause
           Presentation Manager to send a notification message to the Combobox
           owner. This message, in effect, simulates a user pressing the ENTER
           key.
           Change Data - When an item in a Combobox entry field is changed, the
           Combobox sends a notification message to the owner window.

 The above options are listed in the Action On dialog window. To select an
 action from the list box, either click on the target with the mouse, or use
 the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection is to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (Chapter 3.10).

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                Combobox control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this Combobox control, as well as
           any children of this Combobox.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. Dlg Combo Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Name

Each combobox has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the combination
box in response to user input. The application responds to these messages by
using this identifier of the combination box control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate
items in a combination box using the Name identifier as an argument.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. Dlg Combo Order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the Combobox currently
being defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. Dlg Combo PresParams ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size and the foreground,
background and border colors of the Combobox items.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section for information on defining
presentation objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4. SIMPLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These combo box control styles are available:

CBS_SIMPLE

 Both the entry field control and the list box control are visible. When the
selection changes in the list box control, the text of the selected item in the
list box control is placed in the entry field. Also, the text in the entry
field is completed by extending the text of the entry field with the closest
match from the list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5. DROPDOWN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These combo box control styles are available:

CBS_DROPDOWN

 Inherits all the properties of a combo box control with a style of CBS_SIMPLE
and, in addition, the list box control is hidden until the user requests that
it should be displayed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6. DROPDOWNLIST ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These combo box control styles are available:

CBS_DROPDOWNLIST

 In which the entry field control is replaced by a static control that displays
the current selection from the list box control. The user must explicitly cause
the display of the list box control in order to make alternative selections in
the list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.7. Dlg Combo Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_GROUP

 This identifies the dialog items that make up a `group'.

 This style should be specified on the first window of any group. Subsequent
windows of the group must not have this style. The windows of the group must be
adjacent siblings. This can be done by listing the windows consecutively in
templates or by inserting each new window in the group behind the previous one
(WinCreateWindow).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.8. Dlg Combo TabStop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_TABSTOP

 This identifies a dialog item as one to which the operator can TAB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.9. Dlg Combo Ok ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Combobox Control Styles dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.10. Dlg Combo Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the Combobox control while in
           the Combobox Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the
           changes and restore the original settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.11. Dlg Combo EntryHelp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Static
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control with
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.12. Dlg Combo Action ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the Combobox control item when the user selects it.
                The Action On dialog window allows you to define processing for
                the following user actions:

           Click - Presentation Manager generates a notification message to the
           owning window when the user clicks on any item in the list box.
           Double Click - Double clicking on an item in a Combobox will cause
           Presentation Manager to send a notification message to the Combobox
           owner. This message, in effect, simulates a user pressing the ENTER
           key.
           Change Data - When an item in a Combobox entry field is changed, the
           Combobox sends a notification message to the owner window.

 The above options are listed in the Action On dialog window. To select an
 action from the list box, either click on the target with the mouse, or use
 the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection is to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (Chapter 3.10).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.13. Dlg Combo Destroy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                Combobox control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this Combobox control, as well as
           any children of this Combobox.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Dlg Edit EntryField ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Create Entry Field (ALT+C,E)

Clicking on the Create Entry Field (ALT+C,E) action will generate an entry
field control and allow you to attach it to any visible window. Once the
control is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will invoke the
Entry Field Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-12.

Entry fields are rectangular windows that display a single line of text a user
can edit. When an entry field has the focus, it displays a flashing bar, called
the cursor, that marks the current point where text can be entered. Entry
fields send notification messages to the owner window when gaining or losing
focus, or when the contents of the entry field have changed.

As shown, the Entry Field Control Styles dialog window consists of entry
fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and pushbuttons. Some of
these controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the following
descriptions:

Name

Each entry field has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the entry field
in response to user input. The application responds to these messages by using
this identifier of the entry field control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate text
in the entry field using the Name identifier as an argument.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the entry field
currently being defined.

Text

You can specify the text that is displayed in the entry field with this option.
The application can replace this default text during runtime as well using OS/2
Presentation Manager API calls.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size, as well as the
foreground, background, and border colors of the entry field text.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.X.X) for information on
defining presentation objects.

Text Styles Group Box

The Text Styles group box contains a number of radio buttons that define how
the text in the entry field will be drawn.

Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one option can be set at one time.
Each of the entry field options will be described below.

 Left Aligned   This option is set to on by default. Entry field controls with
                this style will display text flush left within the control
                window.
 Centered       This option is set to off by default. Click this option on if
                you want to center the text in the entry field control window.
 Right Aligned  This option is set to off by default. Entry field controls with
                this style will display text flush right within the control
                window.

 Entry Field Options Group Box

 The Entry Field Options group box contains a number of check boxes that
 control the display and formatting of text in the entry field control.

 Being check boxes, Gpf will generate the option if set to on. You may combine
 more than one option with the entry field control.    Each of the options are
 described as follows:

  Margin        This option is set to ON by default. The margin option will
                paint a wide border around the entry field control window.
  Command       ** currently undefined  except in PM SDK header files.
                Reserved for future expansion.
  Autoscroll    This option is set to on by default. With this option set to
                on, the entry field control will scroll lengthy text within the
                control window horizontally.
  Unreadable    This option is set to off by default. When this option is
                selected,  any text entered in the entry field control will be
                masked with asterisk '*' characters. This is a useful option
                for entering passwords, or other sensitive data entry items.
  Autotab       ** currently undefined.
  Read Only     This option is off by default. When this option is set to on,
                the user cannot change the text within the entry field.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics for the current entry field control. Typically, these options
 are for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the entry field control will act as an encapsulated group. It
                will receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group style
                remains in effect until the next control with a similar style
                is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 Control Window Group Box

 The Control Window group box provide additional options for setting
 characteristics of an entry field control.

  Max Length    This option is off by default. When the check box is set, a
                text length entry field is displayed. You can set the maximum
                length of characters that the user may enter with this option.

                NOTE: this function is disabled if the current field is
                associated with a database (selected in the Program Properties
                dialog.)

  Picture Mask  ** currently undefined.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Entry Field Control Styles dialog window.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the Entry Field control while in
           the Entry Field Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the
           changes and restore the original settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Entry Field
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the Entry Field control item when the user selects
                it. The Action On dialog window allows you to define processing
                for the following user actions:

           Kill Focus - When the entry field loses the keyboard focus, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.
           Set Focus - When the entry field receives the keyboard focus, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.
           Change Data - When the contents of the entry field changes, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.
           The above options are listed in the Action On dialog window. To
           select an action from the list box, either click on the target with
           the mouse, or use the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been  selected, and the processing
                for that selection are to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows and associated processes are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (Chapter 3.10).

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                Entry Field control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this Entry Field control, as well
           as any children of this Entry Field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. Dlg Edit Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Name

Each entry field has an identifying name. During program execution,  the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the entry field
in response to user input. The application responds to these messages by using
this identifier of the entry field control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. Dlg Edit Order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the entry field
currently being defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. Dlg Edit Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Text

You can specify the text that is displayed in the entry field with this option.
The application can replace this default text during runtime as well using OS/2
Presentation Manager API calls.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4. Dlg Edit PresParams ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentations

The presentation parameter is a drop down list from which you select the visual
attributes to assign to the current object.

Presentations behave similarly to Desktop Publisher 'tags'; once defined they
can be re-used, i.e., attached to as many controls as you desire.

A new application will only have the choice NULL, which assigns system defaults
to the current object.

Note:  There are no pre-defined presentations supplied. You must create one or
       more presentations through the Object- Presentation menu from the main
       editor Action Bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5. LEFT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one option can be set at one time.
Each of the entry field options will be described below.

 Left Aligned   This option is set to on by default. Entry field controls with
                this style will display text flush left within the control
                window.
 Centered       This option is set to off by default. Click this option on if
                you want to center the text in the entry field control window.
 Right Aligned  This option is set to off by default. Entry field controls with
                this style will display text flush right within the control
                window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6. CENTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one option can be set at one time.
Each of the entry field options will be described below.

 Left Aligned   This option is set to on by default. Entry field controls with
                this style will display text flush left within the control
                window.
 Centered       This option is set to off by default. Click this option on if
                you want to center the text in the entry field control window.
 Right Aligned  This option is set to off by default. Entry field controls with
                this style will display text flush right within the control
                window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.7. RIGHT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one option can be set at one time.
Each of the entry field options will be described below.

 Left Aligned   This option is set to on by default. Entry field controls with
                this style will display text flush left within the control
                window.
 Centered       This option is set to off by default. Click this option on if
                you want to center the text in the entry field control window.
 Right Aligned  This option is set to off by default. Entry field controls with
                this style will display text flush right within the control
                window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8. MARGIN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

  Margin        This option is set to ON by default. The margin option will
                paint a wide border around the entry field control window.

  This style can be used to cause a frame to be drawn around the control, with
 a margin around the editable text. The margin is half a character-width wide
 and half a character-height high.

  When an entry field control with this style is positioned, it adjusts the
 position so that the text is placed at the position specified. This position
 differs from the original position by the width of the border and the margin.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.9. AUTOSCROLL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

  Autoscroll    This option is set to on by default. With this option set to
                on, the entry field control will scroll lengthy text within the
                control window horizontally.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10. AUTOTAB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

AUTOTAB

This flag exists in PM SDK header files but is currently undefined in MS or IBM
documentation.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.11. READONLY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

READONLY

 This style causes a single line entry field to be created in read only state.

 When an entry field is in read only state, characters do not get inserted into
the text.

 However the insertion interface is still functional.

 The entry field read only state can be altered by use of the EM_SETREADONLY
message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12. COMMAND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Command

defined in PM SDK header files but undefined in MS or IBM documentation.
Reserved for expansion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.13. UNREADABLE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

UNREADABLE

 This style causes the text not to be displayed (for passwords, for example).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.14. Dlg Edit Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_GROUP

 This identifies the dialog items that make up a `group'.

 This style should be specified on the first window of any group. Subsequent
windows of the group must not have this style. The windows of the group must be
adjacent siblings. This can be done by listing the windows consecutively in
templates or by inserting each new window in the group behind the previous one
(WinCreateWindow).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.15. Dlg Edit TabStop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_TABSTOP

 This identifies a dialog item as one to which the operator can TAB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.16. MAXLNG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Control Window Group Box

The Control Window group box provide additional options for setting
characteristics of an entry field control.

  Max Length    This option is off by default. When the check box is set, a
                text length entry field is displayed. You can set the maximum
                length  of characters that the user may enter with this option.

                NOTE: this function is disabled if the current field  is
                associated with a database (selected in the Program Properties
                dialog.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.17. MAXLENGTH ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The length appears if you check the MaxLength checkbox. Type in the number of
characters which are to be allowed in this field.

Note:  If a DB has been associated with this field, length is set to AUTO and
       cannot be adjusted.

Note:


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.18. PICTUREMASK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Defined in PM SDK header files but undefined in MS or IBM documentation.
Reserved for expansion.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.19. Dlg Edit Ok ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Entry Field Control Styles dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.20. Dlg Edit Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the Entry Field controlwhile in
           the Entry Field Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the
           changes and restore the original settings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.21. Dlg Edit EntryHelp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Entry Field
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.22. Dlg Edit Action ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the Entry Field control item when the user selects
                it. The Action On dialog window allows you to define processing
                for the following user actions:

           Kill Focus - When the entry field loses the keyboard focus, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.
           Set Focus - When the entry field receives the keyboard focus, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.
           Change Data - When the contents of the entry field changes, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.
           The above options are listed in the Action On dialog window. To
           select an action from the list box, either click on the target with
           the mouse, or use the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection are to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows and associated processes are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (Chapter 3.10).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.23. Dlg Edit Destroy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                Entry Field control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this Entry Field control, as well
           as any children of this Entry Field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Dlg Window/Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Create Window/Dialog (ALT+C,W)

You can generate a new window for your application definition through the use
of the Create Window/Dialog action. For example, if you need to create a dialog
window for a response to a menu selection you would use this option to first
create the window template. You could then design this template to
specification, adding the additional controls and actions that you want the
window to have.

When Gpf first generates the new window, it has the following characteristics:

           Title Bar
           System Menu
           Minimize and Maximize Buttons
           Sizing Border

 Unlike the standard window that Gpf generates when you use the File New
 (ALT,F,N) pull-down action, the generated window does NOT include a menu bar
 control. A menu bar can be added to this new window with the Create Menu
 (ALT+C,M) pull-down action.

 Once the new window is generated by the Create Window/Dialog action, the
 Window/Dialog Styles dialog window will appear to allow you to set the new
 window/dialog characteristics. Following is a description of each of the
 characteristic styles available for the new window, or dialog window. Figure
 3-6 can be used as a reference.

 As shown, the Window/Dialog Styles dialog window consists of a number of entry
 fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and pushbuttons. Some
 of these controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the
 following descriptions.

 Name

 Each window or dialog window you create is named. This name is used as a
 reference for other controls and is also used for function naming when
 application source code is generated. By default, Gpf will name the windows in
 chronological order as follows:

 MainWindow     This is the name given to the first window created by Gpf when
                you use the File New (ALT+F,N) action.
 Window1        This is the name given to the first window created by Gpf when
                you use the Create Window/Dialog (ALT+C,W) action.
 WindowX        This is the name given to each additional window created with
                the Create Window/Dialog action, where X is equal to the next
                sequential number of the  window created.

 For example, if you have created two windows using the Create Window/Dialog
 action, in addition to the window create from File New, the windows that Gpf
 will have generated would be:

           MainWindow
           Window1
           Window2

 You can enter a different name in this field if you do not want to use the
 names generated by Gpf. If you decide to change the default name, it would be
 best if you could make the window name as descriptive as possible. It is
 easier to guess the window relationship from a name such as:

           ListDataFieldsDialog

    rather than

           T5rKjd832 !

 Window Names can contain as many as 20 characters, including underscore
 characters (_), hyphens (-), and periods (.), as well as any letter or number.
 You cannot use spaces in the Names field.

 Before discussing the next two controls, Parent and Owner, it is appropriate
 to examine what effect these controls have on the newly created window and the
 rest of the application.

 Parent and Owner Window Relationships

 There are two types of relationships that exist for Presentation Manager
 windows: parent-child, and ownership. Both will be discussed , as well as the
 effect that setting the Parent and Owner controls has on a new window or
 dialog window.

 NOTE: The recommended Parent and Owner for MODAL dialog boxes is DESKTOP.

 Parent-Child Relationships

 With the exception of the Presentation Manager Desktop and Desktop-Object
 windows, most windows have a parent window. For example, the first window you
 create in an application uses the Presentation Manager Desktop window as its
 parent. This first window is considered to be a child of the Desktop window.

 All windows are drawn relative to its parent window. All coordinates are based
 on the lower-left (0,0) corner of its parent window. For example, a window
 whose coordinates are (20,20) is placed 20 pixels left and 20 pixels up from
 the lower-left corner of its parent window.

 Many windows can share the same parent window; these are called sibling
 windows. Sibling windows can overlap on the screen; an application or a user
 can arrange the windows so that some appear on top of others. Each child
 window can have itself designated as a parent to a new window. Each child
 window in this chain of windows is called a descendant window of the original
 parent window.

 All child windows are clipped to the parent window, meaning that no part of a
 child window can exist outside of the parent. If the child window is larger
 then the client area of the parent window, the system will automatically clip
 the portion of the child that extends beyond the parent so that it does not
 appear.

 Setting the Parent control, in the Create Window/Dialog Styles dialog window,
 to DESKTOP will allow the new window to exist OUTSIDE of all the other defined
 windows in the application. The coordinate system is relative to the lower-
 left corner of the screen, which is the desktop window's lower-left corner.
 This window can be minimized, restored, or maximized, without effecting other
 windows within the application.

 Setting the Parent control in the Create Window/Dialog Styles dialog window to
 any window other than DESKTOP will cause the new window to appear WITHIN the
 boundaries of that designated parent. The new window will be clipped to the
 parent window so that if you shrink the parent window you will reduce the
 visible region of the child window. Also, if you hide or destroy the parent
 window, the child windows are hidden or destroyed as well.

 Ownership

 Any window can have an owner window. An owner is a window, not necessarily a
 parent window, that controls some aspect of another window. Ownership is
 typically used to establish a connection between  windows so that together
 they carry out useful tasks. This connection is usually in the form of
 messaging communications between the window and the owner.  For example, the
 title bar in an application's main window is owned by the frame window.
 Together they let the user move the entire application window by clicking the
 mouse in the title bar.

 Ownership establishes a relationship between windows that is independent of
 the parent-child relationship. Unlike parent and child windows, there are no
 predefined rules for how the owner and owned windows interact.

 Setting the Owner control in the Create Window/Dialog Styles dialog window to
 DESKTOP will establish ownership of the newly created window to the desktop
 window. The desktop will control the communication of messages to the newly
 created window.

 Setting the Owner control in the Create Window/Dialog Styles dialog window to
 any window other than DESKTOP will establish ownership of the newly created
 window to that of the designated window. The owner window will send messages
 to, and receive messages from, the newly created window.

 Window/Dialog Styles dialog window controls

 Parent

 The parent of the newly created window can be set from this control. The
 Parent control is a combination box which will list all the currently defined
 windows or dialog windows that were present when you created the new window.

 By default Gpf will list the DESKTOP window as the parent. You may select
 another window as the parent by clicking on the down arrow button on the
 Parent control. If there are any other windows that are defined in the current
 application, they will be listed here.

 Owner

 The owner of the newly created window can be set from this control. The Owner
 control is a combination box, like the Parent control, which will list all of
 the currently defined windows.

 By default Gpf will list the DESKTOP window as the owner of the newly created
 window. You may select another window as the owner by clicking on the down
 arrow button on the Owner control. If there are any other windows that are
 defined for the current application, they will be listed here.

 Title

 The Title control is an entry field where you can enter the text that you want
 to have appear in the newly created window's title bar. This text is typically
 the name of the application itself. For example, Gpf displays "Gpf Editor
 [Filename.ORC]" in its title bar.

 Title text can contain a maximum of 108 characters.

 Source

 The Source control is a combination box where you can select or define the
 name of the source file where you want Gpf to generate the newly defined
 window's source code.

 The name is not required to be the same name that is entered in the Main
 Window properties. When Gpf generates the source code for a multiple window
 and multiple source file definition, the appropriate compilation and link
 statements will be generated as well.

 To select an existing source file name for the window, click the down arrow
 button on the combination box to display a list of defined source names. By
 clicking on a selection from this list, the entry field portion of the
 combination box will change to reflect the new choice.

 If you want to create a new source file for the window, position the mouse
 pointer at the beginning of the currently displayed source file and type the
 new name to replace it.

 Thread

 The Thread control is a combination box where you can select which thread the
 new window will execute under.

 To select a thread for the window, click the downward pointing arrow button on
 the combination box to display a list of defined thread names. By clicking on
 a selection from this list, the entry field portion of the combination box
 will change to reflect the chosen thread name.

 If you want to create a new thread of execution for the window, position the
 mouse pointer at the beginning of the currently displayed thread name and type
 the new name in to replace it.

 Gpf will automatically generate the necessary source code for creating an OS/2
 thread for the window.

 Presentation Client

 This control is a combination box where you can select the presentation
 parameters of the window client area, such as fonts, colors, visual frame
 attributes, etc.

 This combination box is read-only, therefore you will only be allowed to
 select from a list of pre-defined objects. To define these objects, see
 section 3.5.2.2. If none are defined there will be one and only one choice:
 NULL. The NULL choice specifies system defaults, as set via the Control Panel.

 To select a presentation for the window, click the downward pointing arrow
 button on the combination box to display the list of objectss. When you click
 on a selection from this list, the entry field portion of the combination box
 will change to reflect the color you chose. You will notice a small box marked
 "Color" in the Styles dialog window. As you choose a selection in the Color
 control this box will display a sample of the basic color of the selected
 presentation.

 Presentation Frame

 The Presentation control allows you to select an object from a list of
 Presentation Objects that were predefined for this application. These objects
 allow you to set the formatting and color of the basic frame being created.

 Like the Presentation Client control, the Presentation Frame control is a
 read-only combination box.

 To select a Presentation Object for the window title text, click the downward
 pointing arrow button on the combination box to display a list of Presentation
 Objects. By clicking on a selection from this list, the entry field portion of
 the combination box will change to reflect the object you chose. By default,
 this entry contains NULL.

 For a complete explanation of Presentation Objects, refer to the section
 titled Object Pull-down ( section 3.5).

 Icon

 The Icon control is a read-only combination box where you can set the icon
 that will be displayed when the window is minimized by the user.

 To select an icon for the window, click the downward pointing arrow button on
 the combination box.  A list of Icon Objects will be displayed. By clicking on
 a selection from this list, the entry field portion of the combination box
 will change to reflect the object you chose.  You will notice a small box
 marked "Icon" in the Styles dialog window.  As you choose a selection in the
 Icon control this box will display the actual icon.

 Icons are defined as Objects, just like Presentation Objects.  Refer to the
 section titled Object Pull-down, section 3.5, for a full description on
 defining Icon and Bitmap Objects.

 Choose Styles Group Box

 The Choose Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will affect
 the appearance of your window.

 Check boxes turn on the related style when there is an 'X' in the check box
 itself. If the check box is empty, Gpf will not generate the style for the
 window. Each of the styles available will be described.

  Title Bar     This option is set to on by default.  The title bar is located
                at the top of the window. Besides displaying text, the title
                bar is used to move the entire application window around on the
                screen. Click this check box off if you do not want to display
                a window title bar.
  Minimize Button This option is set to on by default. The minimize button
                allows a window to be minimized to an icon. Click this check
                box off if you do not want to have your window minimized.
                Setting this check box to off will also effectively ignore the
                Icon control selection.
  Maximize Button This option is set to on by default. The maximize button
                allows a window to be expanded to the borders of the windows
                parent - the entire screen in the case of the main window.
                Click this check box off if you do not want your application
                window to be maximized.
  System Menu   This option is set to on by default. The system menu provides
                the user with window sizing and placement controls via keyboard
                commands and pull-down menu actions. Click this check box off
                if you do not want to have a system menu displayed on your
                application window.
  Appl Menu     This option is set to on for the first window created in the
                Gpf application definition, and set to off for each window
                created thereafter. If this option is on, and a menu bar has
                been created for the window, Gpf will display a warning that
                the existing menu bar will be destroyed if you click this check
                box to off. If this check box option is off, and you later
                create a menu for the window, Gpf will automatically set this
                to on.
  Horz Scroll Bar This option is set to off by default. If you click this check
                box on, Gpf will create a horizontal scroll bar along the
                bottom of the client window.
  Vert Scroll Bar This option is set to off by default. If you click this check
                box on, Gpf will create a vertical scroll bar along the right
                border ( facing the screen ) of the client window.
  Information Message This option is set to off by default. If you click this
                check box on, Gpf will allow you to display one line
                informational text in the Information message box. The
                Information message box is located along the bottom of the
                client window, above the horizontal scroll bar if one is
                defined. The text for the Information message box can be
                specified in the Entry Extended Help dialog box. Refer to the
                Common Dialog Window section of this document for an detailed
                explanation of the Information Message.

  Appl Modal    This option is set to off by default. Windows with the
                application modal style set to ON will not allow you to access
                other windows, or menus, within the application until the modal
                window is dismissed. This style is usually found set to ON for
                dialog windows.
  System Modal  This option is set to OFF by default. Windows with the system
                modal style set to ON will not only prevent you from accessing
                other windows or menus within the application, but will also
                prevent access to any other application on the system. The
                system modal style is typically set to on to signal the user of
                a critical error, or of some other reason that requires
                immediate attention.

           NOTE: It is recommended that MODAL dialog boxes have the DESKTOP as
           both owner and parent.

 Choose Options Group Box

 The Choose Options group box contains a number of check boxes that will effect
 how Presentation Manager controls various aspects of your window.

 Check boxes are considered to be turned ON for the related option when there
 is an 'X' in the check box itself. If the check box is empty, Gpf will not
 generate the option for the window. Each of the options available will be
 described.

  Logo          This option is set to OFF by default. The Logo is an opening
                window for your application, usually containing copyright or
                application specific information. Click this option ON if you
                want to have your application display a logo. Note that
                Presentation Manager can override this option if the PM Control
                Panel option for displaying a logo is set to OFF.
  Save Bits     This option is set to ON by default. The Save Bits instructs
                Presentation Manager to save the image under the window as a
                bitmap. When the window is moved or hidden, the system restores
                the image by copying the bits. Click this option to OFF if you
                do not want bitmap images saved.
  NoMoveWithOwner This option is set to OFF by default. This option will
                instruct Presentation Manager to create a window that will not
                move if the owner window moves. Click this option ON if you
                want your window NOT to move with the owner window.
  Adjust        This option is set to OFF by default. This GPF feature, when
                set to ON, will cause all controls to re-size if the enclosing
                window is re-sized. This effect can be viewed in ANIMATOR mode.
  SyncPaint     This option is set to ON by default. This option, when set to
                on, will cause the window to immediately receive WM_PAINT
                messages after a part of the window becomes invalid. When this
                option is set to OFF, the window receives WM_PAINT messages
                only if no higher priority messages are waiting to be processed
                in the window message queue.
  NoByteAlign   This option is set to OFF by default. This option will instruct
                Presentation Manager to create a window that is not byte
                aligned. If this option is set to OFF, Presentation Manager
                will align the window on an eight byte boundary. This results
                in faster screen drawings in the client window.

 Border Styles Group Box

 The Border Styles group box contains a number of radio buttons that will
 control the type of border your window will have.

 Radio buttons in a group box are mutually exclusive. Only one can be set to on
 in the group at one time. By clicking on the different border options, you
 will set the radio button ON for the new option, while turning the radio
 button OFF on the previously set option.

 Sizeable Border This option is set to OFF by default. The Sizeable Border
                option instructs Gpf to generate a border around the window
                that will allow the user to size the height and width of the
                window with the mouse or keyboard commands. This border style
                is typically used in most OS/2 Presentation Manager
                applications.
 Window Border  This option is set to OFF by default. The Window Border option
                instructs Gpf to generate a thin lined border around the
                window. The user cannot change the size of the window when this
                option is set to ON. This border type is typically used for
                windows that display a quick message to the user and are then
                dismissed.
 Dialog Border  This option is set to OFF by default. The Dialog Border option
                instructs Gpf to generate a border that is thicker than the
                Window Border. The user is still prohibited from changing the
                size of the window. This border type is typically used for
                dialog windows.
 No Border      This option is set to OFF by default. The No Border option
                instructs Gpf NOT to generate any border whatsoever around the
                window. This border type is typically used for windows with a
                parent other then the DESKTOP.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Window Styles dialog window.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the windows appearance, Gpf will automatically update the window to
           reflect those changes. For example, if the window was created with a
           Sizeable Border, and you change the border type to Window Border,
           the window's border will be changed to a Window Border type.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the window while in the Window
           Style dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes and restore the
           original control settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Window
                Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the general
                help text for your window. The text that you enter will be
                displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Manager if the user
                presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the window from the
           Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section for a detailed explanation
 of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A) will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the window during the following stages:

 Window Creation or Initialization - Presentation Manager

 creates or initializes every window or dialog window. The developer can change
 the default processing during the creation phase with either different
 pre-defined actions, or their own source code.

 Window Activation - After the above step, the window

 is then activated. The developer can change the default processing during the
 activation phase with either different pre-defined actions, or their own
 source code.

 Window DeActivation - This occurs when the user or application

 has dismissed or destroyed the window. The developer can change the default
 deactivation processing with either pre- defined actions, or their own source
 code.

 Each of the above are listed in the Action On dialog window. To select an
 action from the list box, either click on the target phase with the mouse, or
 use the directional keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection are to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section.

 OK             When you are finished viewing or modifying the action
                processing for the window, click on the OK (ALT+O) button to
                return to the Window Styles dialog window.
 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                window as well as any children windows associated with the
                window. This option is NOT available for the main window, as
                every application must have at least one window.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this window, as well as any
           children of this window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1. Dlg Frame Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Name

Each window or dialog window you create is named. This name is used  as a
reference for other controls and is also used for function naming  when
application source code is generated. By default, Gpf will name the windows in
chronological order as follows:

 MainWindow     This is the name given to the first window created by Gpf when
                you use the File New (ALT+F,N) action.
 Window1        This is the name given to the first window created by Gpf when
                you use the Create Window/Dialog (ALT+C,W) action.
 WindowX        This is the name given to each additional window created with
                the Create Window/Dialog action, where X is equal to the next
                sequential number of the  window created.

 For example, if you have created two windows using the Create Window/Dialog
 action, in addition to the window create from File New, the windows that Gpf
 will have generated would be:

           MainWindow

           Window1

           Window2

 You can enter a different name in this field if you do not want to use the
 names generated by Gpf. If you decide to change the default name, it would be
 best if you could make the window name as descriptive  as possible. It is
 easier to guess the window relationship from a name such as:

           ListDataFieldsDialog

       rather than

           T5rKjd832 !

 Window Names can contain as many as 20 characters, including underscore
 characters (_), hyphens (-), and periods (.), as well as any letter or number.
 You cannot use spaces in the Names field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2. Dlg Frame Source ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Source

The Source control is a combination box where you can select or define  the
name of the source file where you want Gpf to generate the newly defined
window's source code.

The name is not required to be the same name that is entered in the  Main
Window properties. When Gpf generates the source code for a multiple  window
and multiple source file definition, the appropriate compilation  and link
statements will be generated as well.

To select an existing source file name for the window, click the down  arrow
button on the combination box to display a list of defined source  names. By
clicking on a selection from this list, the entry field portion of the
combination box will change to reflect the new choice.

If you want to create a new source file for the window, position the  mouse
pointer at the beginning of the currently displayed source file and type the
new name to replace it.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.3. Dlg Frame Parent ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Parent

The parent of the newly created window can be set from this control.  The
Parent control is a combination box which will list all the currently  defined
windows or dialog windows that were present when you created the new window.

By default Gpf will list the DESKTOP window as the parent. You may select
another window as the parent by clicking on the down arrow button on the Parent
control. If there are any other windows that are defined in the current
application, they will be listed here.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.4. Dlg Frame Thread ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Thread

The Thread control is a combination box where you can select which thread the
new window will execute under.

To select a thread for the window, click the downward pointing arrow  button on
the combination box to display a list of defined thread names. By clicking on a
selection from this list, the entry field portion of the combination box will
change to reflect the chosen thread  name.

If you want to create a new thread of execution for the window, position  the
mouse pointer at the beginning of the currently displayed thread name and type
the new name in to replace it.

Gpf will automatically generate the necessary source code for creating  an OS/2
thread for the window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5. Dlg Frame Owner ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Owner

The owner of the newly created window can be set from this control.  The Owner
control is a combination box, like the Parent control, which  will list all of
the currently defined windows.

By default Gpf will list the DESKTOP window as the owner of the newly  created
window. You may select another window as the owner by clicking  on the down
arrow button on the Owner control. If there are any other windows that are
defined for the current application, they will be listed here.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.6. Dlg Frame PresParams Frame ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentations

The presentation parameter is a drop down list from which you select the visual
attributes to assign to the current object.

Presentations behave similarly to Desktop Publisher 'tags'; once defined they
can be re-used, i.e., attached to as many controls as you desire.

A new application will only have the choice NULL, which assigns system defaults
to the current object.

Note:  There are no pre-defined presentations supplied. You must create one or
       more presentations through the Object- Presentation menu from the main
       editor Action Bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.7. Dlg Frame Title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Title

The Title control is an entry field where you can enter the text that  you want
to have appear in the newly created window's title bar. This text is typically
the name of the application itself. For example, Gpf displays "Gpf Editor
[Filename.ORC]" in its title bar.

Title text can contain a maximum of 108 characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.8. Dlg Frame PresParams Client ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentations

The presentation parameter is a drop down list from which you select the visual
attributes to assign to the current object.

Presentations behave similarly to Desktop Publisher 'tags'; once defined they
can be re-used, i.e., attached to as many controls as you desire.

A new application will only have the choice NULL, which assigns system defaults
to the current object.

Note:  There are no pre-defined presentations supplied. You must create one or
       more presentations through the Object- Presentation menu from the main
       editor Action Bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.9. Dlg Frame TitleBar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

  Title Bar     This option is set to on by default.  The title bar is located
                at the top of the window. Besides displaying text, the title
                bar is used to move the entire application window around on the
                screen. Click  this check box off if you do not want to display
                a window title bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.10. Dlg Frame Min ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_MINBUTTON        Minimize button.

  Minimize Button This option is set to on by default. The minimize button
           allows a window to be minimized to an icon. Click this check box off
           if you do not want to have your window minimized. Setting this check
           box to off will also effectively ignore the Icon control selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.11. Dlg Frame Max ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_MAXBUTTON        Maximize button.

  Maximize Button This option is set to on by default. The maximize button
           allows a window to be expanded to the borders of the windows parent
           - the entire screen in the case of the main window. Click this check
           box off if you do not want your application window to be maximized.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.12. Dlg Frame SysMenu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_SYSMENU         System menu.

  System Menu This option is set to on by default. The system menu provides the
           user with window sizing and placement controls via keyboard commands
           and pull-down menu actions. Click this check box off if you do not
           want to have a system menu displayed on your application window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.13. Dlg Frame ApplMenu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_MENU           Application menu.

  Appl Menu This option is set to on for the first window created in the Gpf
           application definition, and set to off for each window created
           thereafter. If this option is on, and a menu bar has been created
           for the window, Gpf will display a warning that the existing menu
           bar will be destroyed if you click this check box to off. If this
           check box option is off, and you later create a menu for the window,
           Gpf will automatically set this to on.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.14. Dlg Frame Hsb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_HORZSCROLL        Horizontal scroll bar.

  Horz Scroll Bar This option is set to off by default. If you click this check
           box on, Gpf will create a horizontal scroll bar along the bottom  of
           the client window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.15. Dlg Frame Vsb ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_VERTSCROLL        Vertical scroll bar.

  Vert Scroll Bar This option is set to off by default. If you click this check
           box on, Gpf will create a vertical scroll bar along the right border
           ( facing the screen ) of the client window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.16. Dlg Frame InfoMsg ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

  Information Message This option is set to off by default. If you click this
           check box on, Gpf will allow you to display one line informational
           text in the Information message box. The Information message box is
           located along the bottom of the client window, above the horizontal
           scroll bar if one is defined. The text for the Information message
           box can be specified in the Entry Extended Help dialog box. Refer to
           the Common Dialog Window section of this document for an detailed
           explanation of the Information Message.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.17. Dlg Frame ApplModal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

  Appl Modal    This option is set to off by default. Windows with the
                application  modal style set to ON will not allow you to access
                other windows, or menus, within the application until the modal
                window is dismissed. This style is usually found set to ON for
                dialog windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.18. Dlg Frame SysModal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_SYSMODAL   The frame window is System Modal.

  System Modal This option is set to OFF by default. Windows with the system
           modal style set to ON will not only prevent you from accessing other
           windows or menus within the application, but will also prevent
           access to any other application on the system. The system modal
           style is typically set to on to signal the user of a critical error,
           or of some other reason that requires immediate attention.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.19. Dlg Frame Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Icon

The Icon control is a read-only combination box where you can set the icon that
will be displayed when the window is minimized by the user.

To select an icon for the window, click the downward pointing arrow  button on
the combination box.  A list of Icon Objects will be displayed.  By clicking on
a selection from this list, the entry field portion of the combination box will
change to reflect the object you chose.  You  will notice a small box marked
"Icon" in the Styles dialog window.  As  you choose a selection in the Icon
control this box will display the actual icon.

Icons are defined as Objects, just like Presentation Objects.  Refer  to the
section titled Object Pull-down, section 3.5, for a full description  on
defining Icon and Bitmap Objects.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.20. Dlg Frame Logo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

  Logo          This option is set to OFF by default. The Logo is an opening
                window for your application, usually containing copyright or
                application  specific information. Click this option ON if you
                want to have your application display a logo. Note that
                Presentation Manager can override  this option if the PM
                Control Panel option for displaying a logo is set to OFF.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.21. Dlg Frame SyncPaint ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WS_SYNCPAINT

Window is synchronously repainted.

 This style is set for windows that have Class Style CS_SYNCPAINT. Applications
can then turn this style on and off to vary the window processing.

 System-Provided Window Styles


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.22. Dlg Frame SaveBits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

WS_SAVEBITS

 This specifies that the screen image of the area under a window of this style
be saved when the window is made visible.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.23. Dlg Frame NoByteAlign ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_NOBYTEALIGN

 When this flag is not set, the frame window is adjusted so that  window
operations, such as moving, can be perfomed in an  optimized manner. For
example, some displays can move a window more quickly if the movement is by a
multiple of eight pels. If this flag is set, such optimizations are not
performed and size and position values are honored.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.24. Dlg Frame NoMove ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_NOMOVEWITHOWNER

 The window should not be moved when its owner is moved.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.25. Dlg Frame AdjustSize ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

  Adjust   This option is set to OFF by default. This GPF feature, when set to
           ON, will cause all controls to re-size if the enclosing window is
           re-sized. This effect can be viewed in ANIMATOR mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.26. Dlg Frame SizeBorder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_SIZEBORDER Wide sizing border.

 Sizeable Border This option is set to ON by default. The Sizeable Border
                option instructs Gpf to generate a border around the window
                that will allow the user to size the height and width of the
                window with the mouse or keyboard commands. This border style
                is typically used in most OS/2 Presentation Manager
                applications.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.27. Dlg Frame WindowBorder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_BORDER Window is drawn with a thin border.

 Window Border This option is set to OFF by default. The Window Border option
           instructs Gpf to generate a thin lined border around the window.
           The user cannot change the size of the window when this option is
           set to ON. This border type is typically used for windows that
           display  a quick message to the user and are then dismissed.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.28. Dlg Frame DlgBorder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

FCF_DLGBORDER  Window is drawn with a standard dialog border.

 Dialog Border This option is set to OFF by default. The Dialog Border option
           instructs Gpf to generate a border that is thicker than the Window
           Border. The user is still prohibited from changing the size of the
           window. This border type is typically used for dialog windows.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.29. Dlg Frame NoBorder ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 No Border This option is set to OFF by default. The No Border option instructs
           Gpf NOT to generate any border whatsoever around the window.  This
           border type is typically used for windows with a parent other then
           the DESKTOP.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8. Dlg Grid ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Options Grid (ALT+O,G)

The Options Grid pull-down action will allow you to set an alignment grid for
windows in the current application definition.  This is useful for insuring
that all controls created are aligned properly within the target window.

Clicking on this option will invoke the Grid Values dialog window.  Please
refer to Figure 3-24 for the following dialog control descriptions:

The Grid Values Dialog Window

The Grid Values dialog windows contain a number of entry fields and pushbuttons
that will allow you to set the grid dimensions for your application windows.
When placed on the window, Gpf will automatically align a control to the
nearest grid coordinates.  This is often referred to in other software packages
as a "snap to" grid.

For the following grid settings, Gpf will allow a maximum dimension size of 5.
All measurements are in relative increments, and the settings entered here will
be reflected in all current application window definitions.

Horizontal (x)

The default is one (1) increment. To have the horizontal grid in your
application window spaced by more than 1 increment, enter the number in this
entry field. The maximum increment is 5.

Vertical (y)

The default is one (1) increment. In this entry field you can set the number of
increments that you would like the vertical grid set to within your application
window.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you have completed any changes in the Grid Values
                dialog window and are ready to exit.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button or pressing the ESC key will
                signal Gpf that you want to exit the Grid Values dialog window
                without saving any changes made.
 HELP           This is the standard gateway button, permitting entry into the
                full HELP system.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.1. GRIDX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the horizontal resolution, the minimum incremental value by which
objects can be sized or moved.  Enter a value in the range 1..5


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 8.2. GRIDY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This is the vertical resolution, the minimum incremental value by which objects
can be sized or moved.  Enter a value in the range 1..5


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9. Dlg EntryHelp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Entry Extended Help Dialog Window

The Entry Extended Help, or Entry Help, dialog window allows you to specify
help text for a particular menu pull-down, menu pull-down action item, control
or window.

This dialog window allows you to define the help descriptive text that the
Presentation Manager Help Facility will display when in invoked. The help text
is context sensitive to each of the defined controls of the application.

The displaying of help text to the user is controlled by the Presentation
Manager Help Facility, and requires no additional coding on your part. Gpf
automatically generates all the required Presentation Manager API calls, as
well as the proper resource definitions for the help text.

Optionally the Entry Extended help dialog will allow you to define a single
informational message that will be displayed along with your application client
window.

The Entry Extended Help Dialog Window

The Entry Extended Help dialog window provides a means for defining context
sensitive help messages for every control (i.e. Window, Button, Scroll Bar,
Menu Pull-down, etc.) in your application. The display of the help text that
you describe is managed by the Presentation  Manager Help Facility, all you
have to do is provide the help reference  titles, subtitles, and text.

Use Figure 3-27 as a reference.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.1. Dlg EntryHelp Title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help Title

When Presentation Manager displays a help window, the title bar of the window
will contain the text relative to what the help facility was invoked for. You
can fill the Help Title field with a short description  of the context for the
current help reference. The panel being created  will also appear in the HELP
Contents pull-down under this name.

The maximum number of characters that can be entered in this field is 31.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.2. Dlg EntryHelp Index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help Index

Part of the Presentation Manager Help Facility is the ability to display  an
index of all the available help text. This provides the user with an easy way
to locate help text quickly. Fill the Help Index field with an index reference
for the current help reference.

The maximum number of characters that can be entered in this field is 31.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.3. Dlg EntryHelp Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Help Text

The Help Text area is a multiple line text entry (MLE) box in which you can
type the help text associated with the current help reference. The MLE supports
standard cut and paste editing control as well as a word wrap feature.

When the user invokes help for a specific item in the application, the
Presentation Manager Help Facility will be invoked. The client window of the
Help Facility will contain the text you enter here.

Text can be entered directly from the keyboard, or can be pasted in via the
system clipboard.  Yet another way is to have the file read in automatically
via the ".im" directive, understood by the IPF utilities.  As a matter of fact,
any ".", "&", or ":" command normally used when creating file-based help panels
can be used here. Gpf itself does very little processing of this text,  other
than to extract it from the '.ORC' file and pass it on to IPF.

Gpf will allow you to enter approximately 4Kbytes of text. If more is required,
use .im filename


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 9.4. Dlg EntryHelp Information Msg ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Information Message

You can optionally define an informational message display in the client window
of your application. The information display box will be positioned at the
bottom of your application client window and is a read only control (i.e. the
user can not modify the text displayed  here).

You can define an informational message for controls, menu items, or child
windows in your application. When the user passes the mouse over them, or
selects then with cursor movements, the information message will appear in the
message box created at the window bottom.

The maximum number of characters that can be entered in this field is 59.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10. Dlg IconBitmapPointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Object Icon/Bitmap/Pointer Objects (ALT+B,I)

Icons, Bitmaps, or Pointers can be incorporated into your application
definition. Once defined as an object they can be set onto the window in the
form of user drawn buttons, static text controls, or even used as the minimize
icon.

Clicking on the Object Icon/Bitmap/Pointer Object (ALT+B,I) pull-down action
will invoke the Icon/Bitmap/Pointer list dialog window.

The Icon/Bitmap/Pointer List dialog window contains a list of all currently
defined Icon/Bitmap/Pointer Objects for the current application definition. The
following will describe adding, editing, or deleting these objects:

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Icon/Bitmap/Pointer List dialog window.
 View/Modify Object Click on this button (ALT+V) to display or modify any
                pre-defined Icon/Bitmap/Pointer objects. The current selection
                in the list will be chosen for this operation. This will invoke
                the Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window for modifying the selected
                object. The Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window is described in
                the following section.
 Add Object     Clicking on the Add Object (ALT+A) button will invoke the
                Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window for defining the controls of
                the new object.

 Icon/Bitmap Object Dialog Window

 The Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window contains radio buttons, entry fields, and
 pushbuttons to assist you in defining the Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object. Each of
 the controls will be described below. Options located in a group box will be
 noted.

 Name

 Each Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object has an identifying name. During the Gpf edit
 session, when you are setting an Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object to a particular
 window, menu, or other control, this name will appear in the
 Icon/Bitmap/Pointer combination box of the particular control setting dialog.

 By default Gpf will insert a Name for you as:

           Iconx

 where x is the sequential number of the next Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object to be
 defined.

 File Name

 The actual file that contains the icon, bitmap, or pointer needs to be
 identified to Gpf. The File Name entry field allows you to type in the name of
 the file created by the Microsoft or IBM Icon Editor, or by a similar bitmap
 creation utility.

 File Type Group Box

 The File Type group box contains a number of radio buttons for indicating what
 type of object is being defined. The options will be described below.

 Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one can be selected at a time.

 Icon           This option is set to on by default. This option indicates that
                you are identifying an Icon drawing as the current object. Gpf
                will search for the file:

           filename.ICO
           where filename is the name of the file as specified in the File Name
           entry field.

 Bitmap         This option is set to off by default. This option indicates
                that you are identifying a Bitmap drawing as the current
                object. Gpf will search for the file:

           filename.BMP
           where filename is the name of the file as specified in the File Name
           entry field.

 Pointer        This option is set to off by default. This option indicates
                that you are identifying a Pointer drawing as the current
                object. Gpf will search for the file:

           filename.PTR
           where filename is the name of the file as specified in the File Name
           entry field.

 Bitmap, pointer, and icon files are closely related.  You may specify an  icon
 to be used as a pointer object and vice-versa. You may also define an icon or
 a pointer as a bitmap object.

 Path

 The Path control is an entry box where you must type in the full path to the
 target icon, bitmap, or pointer file. Gpf will search the path for the above
 described filename and extension.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you have completed the current definition in the
                Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window.

           This will return you to the Icon/Bitmap/Pointer List dialog window,
           where you will be able to view the graphic object as it will appear
           in your application.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button or pressing the ESC key will
                signal Gpf that you want to exit the Icon/Bitmap Object dialog
                window without saving any changes made.

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object.

           Gpf will prompt you with a message to confirm that you want to
           destroy this object, as well  as any children of the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.1. Dlg Ibp Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Name

Each Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object has an identifying name. During the Gpf edit
session, when you are setting an Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object to a particular
window, menu, or other control, this name will appear in the  icon / Bitmap /
Pointer combination box of the particular control setting dialog.

By default Gpf will insert a Name for you as:

           Iconx

 where x is the sequential number of the next Icon/Bitmap/Pointer object to be
 defined


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.2. Dlg Ibp Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Icon           This option is set to on by default. This option indicates that
                you are identifying an Icon drawing as the current object. Gpf
                will search for the file:

           filename.ICO
           where filename is the name of the file as specified in the File Name
           entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.3. Dlg Ibp BitMap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Bitmap         This option is set to off by default. This option indicates
                that you are identifying a Bitmap drawing as the current
                object. Gpf will search for the file:

           filename.BMP
           where filename is the name of the file as specified in the File Name
           entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.4. Dlg Ibp Pointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Pointer        This option is set to off by default. This option indicates
                that you are identifying a Pointer drawing as the current
                object. Gpf will search for the file:

           filename.PTR
           where filename is the name of the file as specified in the File Name
           entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.5. Dlg Ibp Ok ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you have completed the current definition in the
                Icon/Bitmap Object dialog window.

           This will return you to the Icon/Bitmap/Pointer List dialog window,
           where you will be able to view the graphic object as it will appear
           in your application.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.6. Dlg Ibp Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button or pressing the ESC key will
                signal Gpf that you want to exit the Icon/Bitmap Object dialog
                window without saving any changes made.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 10.7. Dlg Ibp Destroy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button or pressing the ESC key will
                signal Gpf that you want to exit the Icon/Bitmap Object dialog
                window without saving any changes made.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 11. Dlg ListAction ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This dialog lists all the actions you have currently defined and the object
that is the target of the action. Use ADD or ADDTOP to insert additional items,
where ADDTOP will place it at the beginning of the list, and ADD will insert it
immediately after the hilited entry.

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12. Dlg ListBox ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Create Listbox (ALT+C,L)

Clicking on the Create Listbox (ALT+C,L) action will generate a list box
control and allow you to attach it to any visible window. Once the control is
placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will invoke the Listbox
Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-10.

As shown, the Listbox Control Styles dialog window consists of a number of
entry fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and pushbuttons.
Some of these controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the
following descriptions:

Name

Each listbox has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the listbox in
response to user input. The application responds to these messages by using
this identifier of the listbox control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate
items in a list box using the Name identifier as an argument.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays, and allows you to
choose which control item, or window, will be a sibling of the listbox
currently being defined.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size, foreground and
background, and border colors of the listbox items.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section for information on defining
presentation objects.

Control Styles Group Box

The Control Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that define what
type of attributes can be applied to the listbox control.

Being check boxes, Gpf will generate the option if it is set to on. You may
combine more than one option per listbox. Each of the options will be described
below:

  Horizontal Scroll Bar This option is set to off by default. When Gpf
                generates the listbox control, it is automatically drawn with a
                vertical scroll bar. Click this option on if you want a
                horizontal scroll bar drawn on this listbox as well.
  Multiple Selection This option is set to off by default. With this option on,
                a user can select multiple listbox items as opposed to just one
                item.

  Owner Draw    This option is set to on by default. When the listbox must be
                redrawn, Presentation Manager will send a notification message
                to the owner window of the list box. This includes when items
                must be hilited ( selected ). Another important effect of Owner
                Draw is the proper columnar alignment of proportional font
                text, e.g. when several fields of a DBM table is displayed in
                the listbox.
  No Adjust Position This option is off by default. With this option set to on,
                the listbox height will automatically adjust to a multiple of
                the height of a listbox selection.

 Sort Options Group Box

 The Sort Options group box contains a number of radio buttons that define how
 text items that fill the listbox should be sorted. This option is active only
 if the items being loaded are done so via  SQL\DBM table functions, i.e. these
 must be columns from the database selected in the Program Properties screen.

 Radio buttons in a group box are mutually exclusive; only one can be set to on
 in the group at one time. Each of the sort options will be described as
 follows:

 None           This option is on by default. Text items in a listbox are
                listed in the order that they were inserted in.
 Ascending      This option is set to off by default. This option will cause
                text items to be inserted in ascending alphabetical order into
                the listbox.
 Descending     This option is set to off by default. This option will cause
                text items to be inserted in descending alphabetical order into
                the listbox.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current listbox control. Typically these options are
 for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the listbox control will act as an encapsulated group. It will
                receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group style remains in
                effect until the next control with a style such as this is
                found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Listbox Control Styles dialog window.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the listbox control appearance, Gpf will automatically update the
           listbox to reflect those changes.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the button control while in the
           Listbox Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes
           and restore the original settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) button in the
                Static Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define
                the general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows (section 3.10) for a detailed
 explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ASSOCIATE      This button is active if you have specified a database in the
                Program Properties (see Files pulldown) screen. If active,
                pressing this button will place you in the Associate dialog, as
                described in the Common Dialog Windows section, 3.10. Briefly
                speaking, from here you can specify which tables\columns to
                extract from your DB, and what is to be done with them.
 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the listbox control item when the user selects it.
                The Action On dialog window allows you to define processing for
                the following user actions:

           Click - Presentation Manager generates a notification message to the
           owning window when the user clicks on any item in the list box.

           Double Click - Double clicking on an item in a listbox will cause
           Presentation Manager to send a LN_ENTER notification message to the
           listbox owner. This message, in effect, simulates a user pressing
           the ENTER key.

           Set and Kill Focus  - When an item in a listbox is selected, the
           listbox is given focus by the system. When another control, menu,
           button, etc., is chosen outside of the listbox, the listbox loses
           the focus.

 The above options are listed in the Action On dialog window. To select an
 action from the list box, either click on the target with the mouse, or use
 the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection is to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10).

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                listbox control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this listbox control, as well as
           any children of this listbox.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.1. Dlg Listbox Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Name

Each listbox has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the listbox in
response to user input. The application responds to these messages by using
this identifier of the listbox control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate
items in a list box using the Name identifier as an argument.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.2. Dlg Listbox Order ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays, and allows  you to
choose which control item, or window, will be a sibling of the listbox
currently being defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.3. HORZSCROLLBAR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A list box can have these styles:

LS_HORZSCROLL

 The list box control enables the operator to scroll the list box horizontally.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.4. MULTIPLESEL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A list box can have these styles:

LS_MULTIPLESEL

 The list box control enables the operator to select more than one item at any
one time. Lists that do not have this style allow only a single selection at
any one time.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.5. OWNERDRAW ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A list box can have these styles:

LS_OWNERDRAW

 The list box control has one or more items that can be drawn by the owner.
Typically, these items are represented by bit maps rather than by text strings.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.6. NOADJUSTPOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

A list box can have these styles:

LS_NOADJUSTPOS

 If this style is included, the list box control is drawn at the size
specified. This can cause parts of an item to be shown.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.7. Dlg Listbox PresParams ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentations

The presentation parameter is a drop down list from which you select the visual
attributes to assign to the current object.

Presentations behave similarly to Desktop Publisher 'tags'; once defined they
can be re-used, i.e., attached to as many controls as you desire.

A new application will only have the choice NULL, which assigns system defaults
to the current object.

Note:  There are no pre-defined presentations supplied. You must create one or
       more presentations through the Object- Presentation menu from the main
       editor Action Bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.8. SORTNONE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This message inserts an item into a list box control.

LIT_END

 Add the item to the end of the list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.9. SORTAS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This message inserts an item into a list box control.

LIT_SORTASCENDING

 Insert the item into the list sorted in ascending order.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.10. SORTDES ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This message inserts an item into a list box control.

LIT_SORTDESCENDING

 Insert the item into the list sorted in descending order.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.11. Dlg Listbox Group ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_GROUP

 This identifies the dialog items that make up a `group'.

 This style should be specified on the first window of any group. Subsequent
windows of the group must not have this style. The windows of the group must be
adjacent siblings. This can be done by listing the windows consecutively in
templates or by inserting each new window in the group behind the previous one
(WinCreateWindow).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 12.12. Dlg Listbox TabStop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_TABSTOP

 This identifies a dialog item as one to which the operator can TAB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 13. Dlg ListIconBitmapPointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

The upper section of the screen is a read-only list of all ICON/BITMAP/POINTER
objects known to your current application. The list includes a (possibly
reduced) picture of the item.

More objects can be added by the ADD or MODIFY buttons below. Delete an object
with DESTROY.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 14. Dlg ListMessageBoxes ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

The list at the top of the screen is read-only and shows all defined message
boxes, with a name and current contents.

You can click on an entry and press one of the editing buttons, or simply
double-click on an entry.

If no objects of this type exist the list is empty.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 15. Dlg List Presentation Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The upper section of the screen is a read-only list of all (if any) defined
presentations, listed by the name you gave them during their creation.

Press Add to insert additional items.

Press View/Modify to edit the properties of an existing presentation object.

Press Destroy to delete an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 16. Dlg List User Function Objects ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The upper section of the screen is a read-only list of all User Function
objects which you have defined.

Select an object with a click and press:

 Add       to insert additional items
 View/modify to edit an existing object

  To delete an object, press View/Modify then press Destroy in the following
 screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 17. Dlg DB Table List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The upper section of this screen is a read-only list of the tables (databases)
which are can be read into the current object.

Press Select Column to add or edit items from this list.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18. Dlg Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Create Menu (ALT+C,M)

The Create Menu action allows you to add a menu bar to a window.

When you create a new Gpf application definition, the first window that is
created contains a default menu bar. For each additional window created, using
the Create Window/Dialog Window (ALT+C,W), Gpf does not generate a menu bar.

Clicking on the Create Menu (ALT+C,M) action will generate a menu bar and allow
you to attach it to any visible window. If the target window does not have a
menu bar already defined, Gpf will immediately invoke the Menu Options dialog
window. Refer to Figure 3-7.

Gpf will allow you to define three types of menu items: top level menu items,
pull-down actions, and submenu items.

Top level menu items are those that are directly visible in the application's
menu bar. Clicking on a top level menu item will typically display a
'pull-down' list of action items. Subsequently, each pull-down action item can
have a pull-down list of menu items, called a submenu. The following text and
control descriptions apply to all three of these menu types.

As shown, the Menu Options dialog window consists of a number of entry fields,
combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and push buttons. Some of these
controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the following
descriptions.

Name

Each menu item has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the menu in
response to user input, either from the mouse or the keyboard. The application
responds to these messages by using the identifier of the menu item that is
contained in each menu message.

Text

You can specify the text that is displayed in the menu or pull-down with the
Text entry field.

You can indicate a mnemonic keystroke for the menu item by preceding that
character in the item text with a tilde, as in "~Open". The user can choose
that item by pressing the mnemonic key when the menu is active.

A menu item can have a keyboard accelerator associated with it. Accelerators
differ from mnemonic keystrokes in that the menu does not have to be active for
the accelerator key to work. Typically the accelerator is displayed to the
right of the menu item. This is done by placing a tab character (\t) in the
menu text before the characters that should be displayed on the right. For
example, to indicate that the F3 function key can be used to exit the
application, the text field entry would contain:

        Exit\tF3

Refer to the Accelerator Key description for generating the proper accelerator
for your menu item.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays, and allows you to
choose, which menu item is a sibling to the currently displayed menu item.

You can re-arrange the position that the menu item appears in by changing the
sibling relationship. The siblings are listed from either the top of the
pull-down list order or across for top level menu items.

Parent and Owner

The Parent and Owner controls are read-only displays which indicate the
respective Parent and Owner of the menu bar. Gpf sets this relationship
automatically, with the menu directly communicating (sending messages) with the
window it is attached to.

Accelerator Key

The Accelerator Key control is a combination box which lists all the available
key combinations  that can be used for the current menu item definition.

Keyboard accelerators provide an optional interface, the keyboard, for
selecting menu items. Accelerators associate keystrokes with menu action items
and therefore do not require the menu itself to be active.

You can select an Accelerator Key from the Accelerator Key combination box for
the current menu item definition by scrolling through the list of predefined
keystroke combinations and clicking on the desired one.

Submenu Presentation

The Submenu Presentation combination box includes a list of all defined
Presentation Objects.  Refer  to the Objects Pull- down (section 3.5) in this
documentation for a description on creating Presentation Objects.

The Presentation Object can change the appearance ( i.e. Foreground and
Background Color,  Font and Font Sizes,  Borders,   etc. ) of the pull-down
menu items.

You can select a Submenu Presentation object by scrolling through the list of
Presentation Objects and clicking on your choice.

Menu Styles Group Box

The Menu Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that affect how
Presentation Manager displays the menu item.

Check boxes are considered to be turned on for the related option when there is
an 'X' in the check box itself. If the check box is empty, Gpf will not
generate the option for the menu item.  Each of the options available will be
described:

  Break         This option is set to off by default. Presentation Manager will
                start a new row or column for the menu item when it encounters
                this style.
  Static        This option is set to off by default. When the Static style
                option is set to on, the menu item is displayed as an
                informational item only. The user cannot select a menu item
                with this type, with either the mouse or keyboard.
  Button Separator This option is set to off by default. When the Button
                Separator style option is set to on, the item cannot be
                selected by using the keyboard cursor keys. The item can only
                be selected with the mouse or defined accelerator keys.
  Break Separator This option is set to off by default.  This style is the same
                as is described above for the Break style, with the exception
                that Presentation Manager will draw a separator line between
                the menu row or column.

 Menu Attributes Group Box

 The Menu Attributes group box contains a number of check boxes that control
 the display aspects of a menu item, such as its highlighted and checked state.

 Check boxes controls are considered to be turned on for the related option
 when there is an 'X' in the check box itself. If the check box is empty, Gpf
 will not generate the option for the menu item. Each of the options available
 will be described.

  No Dismiss    This option is set to OFF by default. When this option is set
                to ON, the menu which contains the current menu item will not
                be dismissed, even after the user makes a menu selection. The
                application becomes responsible for removing the menu from
                view.
  Framed        This option is set to OFF by default. If this option is set to
                ON, the menu item will be framed by vertical lines to the left
                and right.
  Checked       This option is set to OFF by default. If this option is set to
                ON, the menu item will have a check mark to the left of it when
                displayed. The application must control turning the check on
                and off on a menu item during program run- time.
  Disabled      This option is set to OFF by default. The Disabled attribute,
                when set to ON, will gray out the menu item. The user may view
                a grayed menu item, but the system will issue an error beep
                when the menu item is clicked upon. The application is
                responsible for setting and clearing the disabled state of a
                menu item during program run-time.
  Highlighted   This option is set to OFF by default. Presentation Manager will
                normally highlight the topmost pull-down item when a menu list
                is displayed. Set this option ON if you would rather have a
                different menu item highlighted at run-time.

 Menu Type Group Box

 The Menu Type group box contains a number of radio buttons which indicate what
 type of object the menu item is.

 Radio buttons in a group box are mutually exclusive; only one can be set to on
 in the group. Each of the menu types will be described.

 Text           This is the default menu type. The menu item is displayed as a
                text string.
 Bitmap         This menu type allows  you to include a bitmap drawing as the
                menu item. When you enable this option, Gpf will activate the
                bitmap display box and the bitmap object combination box. The
                display box is located to the right of the bitmap option, and
                the combination box is at the bottom of the Type group box. The
                bitmaps must have been previously identified as an object to
                appear in the combination box list. Refer to the Objects
                Pull-down section (Section 3.5) for information on defining
                bitmap objects.
 Separator      This menu type is set to off by default. The Separator type
                will generate a non-selectable horizontal line in the menu
                pull-down list. This is helpful for separating logical groups
                of pull-down actions in the same menu. Any text entered in the
                Text Entry Field is ignored when the Separator type is
                selected.

 Owner Draw     This menu type is set to off by default. When a menu type is
                defined to be of type Owner Draw, then the application is
                responsible for drawing, redrawing, and dismissing the menu.
                The application receives notification messages from the menu
                bar each time a draw request needs to be serviced.

 OK             Click on the OK (ALT+O) button when you are finished viewing or
                modifying the top level, pull-down, or submenu item, and want
                to save the item definitions or changes.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the menu item while in the Menu
           Options dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes and restore the
           original menu settings.

 PULLDOWN       Top level menu items can have a pull-down action list of menu
                items associated with them. The PULLDOWN (ALT+P) button will
                allow you to add, edit, or remove pull-down action items.

           Clicking on the PULLDOWN button will invoke the Selection Pull-down
           dialog window. The Selection Pull-down dialog window will list the
           pull-down action items already defined for the top level.

           Double clicking on an available pull-down item in the list will
           invoke a nested Menu Options dialog window. The control options are
           the same as the ones used when defining the top level menu item with
           the exception that the PULLDOWN button is renamed to SUBMENU.

           If no pull-down items have been defined, you must first add one with
           the ADD ITEM (ALT+A) button.

           Each pull-down menu item can have a submenu associated with it.
           Submenus typically provide 'in line' menu options for the particular
           pull-down action, as opposed to invoking dialog boxes for user
           input.

           Submenu items are defined using the Menu Options dialog window, just
           like the pull-down and top level menu items.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Help (ALT+E) button in the Menu Options
                dialog window, you will be able to define the general help text
                for your menu item. The text that you enter will be displayed
                by the Presentation Manager Help Manager if the user presses
                the F1 key when the menu is the active selection.

           You can also define an informational message for the menu item from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section for a detailed explanation
 of the Entry Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions desired for the menu item when the user selects it. The
                Action On dialog window allows you to define processing for the
                following user action:

               Click

 When the user clicks on the menu item with the mouse, or invokes the menu item
 with an accelerator key. You can define the action associated with the menu
 item selection with pre-defined, or user developed source code .

 The click option is listed in the Action On dialog window. To select an action
 from the list box, either click on the target with the mouse, or use the
 directional keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection is to be viewed or modified, click on the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section.

 OK             Once you are finished viewing or modifying the action
                processing for the menu, click on the OK (ALT+O) button to
                return to the Menu Options Styles dialog window.

           If you are nested in defining pull-down menu items, or submenus, Gpf
           will return to the next highest level. Continue to click the OK
           button until you return to the Gpf edit screen.

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                menu item as well as any pull-down menu items associated with
                the menu.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this menu item, as well as any
           pull-down children of this menu item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.1. MIS_BREAK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Item Style

MIS_BREAK

 The item is the last one in a row or column.  The next item is displayed at
the beginning of a new row or column.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.2. MIS_STATIC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Item Style

MIS_STATIC

 This type of item exists for information purposes only.  It cannot be selected
with the pointing device or keyboard.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.3. MIS_BUTTONSEPARATOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This will right justify the item and insert a vertical separator bar to its
immediate left.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.4. MIS_BREAKSEPARATOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Item Style

MIS_BREAKSEPARATOR

 The same as MIS_BREAK, except that it draws a separator between rows or
columns of a pull-down menu.  This style can only be used within a submenu.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.5. MIA_NODISMISS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu items have the following attributes.

MIA_NODISMISS

 If this item is selected, the pull-down menu containing this item should not
be hidden before notifying the application window of the selection.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.6. MIA_FRAMED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu items have the following attributes.

MIA_FRAMED

 If this attribute is TRUE a frame is drawn around the item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.7. MIA_CHECKED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu items have the following attributes.

MIA_CHECKED

If this attribute is TRUE a checkmark appears next to the item.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.8. MIA_DISABLED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu items have the following attributes.

MIA_DISABLED

 This attribute is TRUE if the item is disabled and cannot be selected.  The
item is drawn in a disabled state.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.9. MIA_HILITED ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu items have the following attributes.

MIA_HILITED

 The state of this attribute is TRUE, if and only if, the item is selected.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.10. MIS_TEXT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Item Style

MIS_TEXT

 The display object is a text string.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.11. MIS_BITMAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Item Style

MIS_BITMAP

 The display object is a bit map.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.12. MIS_SEPARATOR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Menu Item Style

MIS_SEPARATOR

 The display object is a horizontal dividing line.  This type of item can only
be used in pull-down menus.  This type of item cannot be enabled, checked,
disabled, highlighted, or selected by the user.  The functional object is NULL
when this style is specified.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 18.13. MIS_OWNERDRAW ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

MIS_OWNERDRAW

 Items with this style are drawn by the owner. WM_DRAWITEM and WM_MEASUREITEM
notification messages are sent to the owner to draw the item or determine its
size.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19. Dlg Multiple Line Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Create Multiple LE (ALT+C,U)

Clicking on the Create Multiple LE (ALT+C,U) action will generate a Multiple
Line Entry Field (MLE) control and allow you to attach it to any visible
window. Once the control is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf
will invoke the Multiple Line Entry Control Styles dialog window. Refer to
Figure 3-13.

A Multiple Line Entry Field is a sophisticated entry field control window that
the user can use to view and edit multiple lines of text. In addition, a
multiple line entry field provides all the text editing capability of a simple
text editor, making these features readily available to applications.

As shown, the Multiple Line Entry Field Control Styles dialog window consists
of entry fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and
pushbuttons. Some of these controls are located in group boxes and will be
noted in the following descriptions:

Name

Each Multiple LE control has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the Multiple LE
control in response to user input. The application responds to these messages
by using this identifier of the Multiple LE control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate text
in the Multiple Line Entry field using the handle of the MLE as an argument.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the Multiple Line
Entry field currently being defined.

Text

You can specify the text that is initially displayed in the Multiple Line Entry
field with this option. The application can replace this default text during
runtime as well by using OS/2 Presentation Manager API calls.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size, as well as foreground,
background, and border colors of the Multiple Line Entry field text.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.5) for information on
defining presentation objects.

Control Styles Group Box

The Control Styles group box contains a number of check boxes which allow you
to set a number of characteristic styles for the Multiple LE field control.
Each of the Multiple LE options will be described below.

Check boxes are considered to be set to on when a small 'x' appears in the
check box.

  Border        This option is set to ON by default. With this option set to
                on, the Multiple LE field will have a black border drawn around
                it.
  Vert Scroll Bar This option is set to on by default. A vertical scroll bar is
                added to the Multiple LE. The initial state of the scroll bar
                is disabled until the number of lines of text exceed the
                Multiple LE height.
  Word Wrap     This option is set to ON by default. When a line of text
                exceeds the length ( width ) of the Multiple LE, lines will
                automatically break at a convenient place  in the text and wrap
                to the next line.
  Horz Scroll Bar This option is set to OFF by default. A horizontal scroll bar
                is added to the Multiple LE. The initial state of the scroll
                bar is disabled until the width of the text line exceeds the
                Multiple LE width.
  Read Only     This option is set to OFF by default. With this option set, the
                Multiple LE will not accept any date edit or entries. This is
                typically used to display static text.
  Ignore Tab    This option is set to on by default. This directs the Multiple
                LE to ignore tabs entered by the user.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current Multiple LE field control. Typically these
 options are for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the Multiple LE field control will act as an encapsulated
                group. It will receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group
                style remains in effect until the next control with a style
                such as this is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Multiple Line Entry Control Styles dialog window.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation.

           If you have changed any options for the Multiple LE Field control
           while in the Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the
           changes and restore the original settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Multiple
                Line Entry Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to
                define the general help text for your control. The text that
                you enter will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help
                Facility if the user presses the F1 key during application run
                time.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         The ACTION button (ALT+A), will invoke the Gpf Action On dialog
                window. From this dialog window you can set the processing
                actions for the Multiple LE field control item when the user
                selects it. The Action On dialog window allows you to define
                processing for the following user actions:

           Kill Focus - When the Multiple LE field loses the keyboard focus, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.

           Set Focus- When the Multiple LE field receives the keyboard focus, a
           notification message is sent to the owner window.

           Change Data- When the contents of the Multiple LE field have
           changed, a notification message is sent to the owner window.

           The above options are listed in the Action On dialog window. To
           select an action from the list box, either click on the target with
           the mouse, or use the cursor keys on the keyboard.

 View/Modify Action On Once the action has been selected, and the processing
                for that selection are to be viewed or modified, click the
                View/Modify Action On (ALT+V) button. This will invoke the
                Action List dialog window.

 Action List dialog windows, and associated processes, are described in the
 Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10).

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                current Multiple LE field control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this Multiple LE Field, as well as
           any children of this control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.1. MLEBORDER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These multi-line entry field control styles are available:

MLS_BORDER

 A thin border is drawn around the multi-line entry field window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.2. WORDWRAP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These multi-line entry field control styles are available:

MLS_WORDWRAP

 The multi-line entry field initially word-wraps text.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.3. MLEREADONLY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These multi-line entry field control styles are available:

MLS_READONLY

 The multi-line entry field is initially in read-only mode.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.4. VSCROLL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These multi-line entry field control styles are available:

MLS_VSCROLL

 The multi-line entry field displays and handles a vertical scroll bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.5. HSCROLL ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These multi-line entry field control styles are available:

MLS_HSCROLL

 The multi-line entry field displays and handles a horizontal scroll bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.6. IGNORETAB ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These multi-line entry field control styles are available:

MLS_IGNORETAB

 The multi-line entry field ignores tab key strokes.  It passes the appropriate
WM_CHAR to its owner window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.7. DlgMleGroup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_GROUP

 This identifies the dialog items that make up a `group'.

 This style should be specified on the first window of any group. Subsequent
windows of the group must not have this style. The windows of the group must be
adjacent siblings. This can be done by listing the windows consecutively in
templates or by inserting each new window in the group behind the previous one
(WinCreateWindow).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.8. DlgMleTabStop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_TABSTOP

 This identifies a dialog item as one to which the operator can TAB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 19.9. Dlg Mle Pres ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Presentations

The presentation parameter is a drop down list from which you select the visual
attributes to assign to the current object.

Presentations behave similarly to Desktop Publisher 'tags'; once defined they
can be re-used, i.e., attached to as many controls as you desire.

A new application will only have the choice NULL, which assigns system defaults
to the current object.

Note:  There are no pre-defined presentations supplied. You must create one or
       more presentations through the Object- Presentation menu from the main
       editor Action Bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 20. Dlg Message Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Object Message Box Object (ALT+B,M)

Message boxes provide an easy way to display simple messages without creating
dialog windows. A message box is easy to use and is appropriately used when an
application requires a clearly defined response to a static message. Typically,
message boxes consist of an Icon, message text, and the response pushbuttons.

An example of a typical message box would be for querying the user if they want
to continue with an operation.  The message box itself would have a YES and NO
pushbutton for a response.

Clicking on the Object Message Box Object (ALT+B,M) pull-down action will
invoke the Message Box list dialog window.

The Message Dialog window contains a list of all currently defined Message Box
Objects for the current application definition. The following will describe how
to add, edit, or delete Message Box objects:

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Message Dialog window.
 View/Modify Msg Box Click on this button (ALT+V) to display or modify any
                previously defined message box objects. The current selection
                in the Message Dialog list will be chosen for the operation.
                This will invoke the Message Box Object dialog window for
                modification of the selected object. The Message Box Object
                dialog window is described in the following section.
 Add Msg Box    Clicking on the Add Msg Box (ALT+A) button will invoke the
                Message Box Object dialog window for defining the controls of
                the new message box object.

 Message Box Object Dialog Window

 The Message Box Object dialog window contains combination boxes, radio
 buttons, check boxes, multiple line entry fields, and pushbuttons to assist
 you in defining the message box object. Each of the controls will be described
 below. Options located in a group box will be noted.

 Text

 The Text control is a multiple line entry field where you enter the message
 text for the message box. The text entered here is displayed to the user when
 the message box is invoked during application runtime. The multiple line entry
 will automatically word wrap your line of text if it is greater then the width
 of this control.

 Reply Button   The Reply Button is a combination list box with the available
                button combinations that will be displayed with your message
                box. The list of button combinations are standard message box
                responses and should be diverse enough to suit your needs.

           To select a button combination, either click on the selection with
           the mouse, or use the cursor keys to go up and down through the
           list.

 Default Button Group Box

 The Default Button group box contains a number of radio buttons that will
 allow you to define which button of the Reply Button combination will be set
 as the default button. Default buttons are drawn with a thick black border.

 Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one may be selected at one time.

 No 1           This option is set to on by default. This option designates the
                first button in the Reply Button group as the default button.
 No 2           This option is set to off by default. This selection will
                choose the second button in the Reply Button group as the
                default button.
 No 3           This option is set to off by default. This selection will
                choose the third button in the Reply Button group as the
                default button.

 If a default button position is chosen, and the Reply button group does not
 contain as many buttons, the first button will be used as the default button.
 For example, if you choose the YES and NO Reply Button group, and indicate
 that the third button will be the default, then YES will default.

 Icon Group Box

 The Icon group box contains a number of radio buttons which allow you to
 choose an icon to be displayed in the current message box object. When you
 change a selection from this group, an icon representing the selection will be
 displayed in the lower right  corner of the Icon group box.

 Radio buttons are mutually exclusive; only one may be selected at one time.

 No Icon        This option is set to off by default. When selected, the
                defined message box will not have an icon displayed during
                runtime.


 Warning        This option is set to off by default. The Warning icon displays
                an exclamation point ("!") in the defined message box.
 Information    This option is set to on by default. The Information icon
                displays the letter ('i') in the defined message box.
 Error          This option is set to off by default. The Error icon displays a
                stop sign in the defined message box.
 Question       This option is set to off by default. The Question icon
                displays a question mark ("?") in the defined message box.

 Alarm Option Group Box

 The Alarm Option group box contains a number of radio buttons which allow you
 to sound an audible tone upon creation of the message box object. When the
 message box is displayed, during application runtime, the tone will sound.
 Note that certain selections from the Icon group box will set tones of
 different frequencies. These will be identified in the following text.

 No Alarm       With this selection set to on, no tone will be emitted with the
                message box appearance. This option is automatically selected
                when the No Icon option is chosen from the Icon group box.
 Note           This option will cause a high toned beep to sound when the
                message box is displayed. Setting either Information or
                Question icons from the Icon group box will automatically
                select this option.
 Warning        This option will cause a beep (an octave lower in pitch than
                the Note beep) to be emitted when the message box is displayed.
                Setting the Warning icon from the Icon group box will
                automatically select this option.
 Error          This option will cause a beep (an octave lower in pitch than
                the Warning beep) to be emitted when the message box is
                displayed. Setting the Error icon from the Icon group box will
                automatically select this option.

 Modal Group Box

 The Modal group box contains two radio buttons that will set the modal style
 of the message box.

 Appl           This option is set to off by default. When the Appl modal
                option is selected, the message box must be dismissed before
                input is allowed into any other window in the owner
                application. Other applications running under Presentation
                Manager may be accessed without responding to this message box.
 System         This option is set to on by default. The System modal option
                requires that the message box is dismissed before any other
                application running under Presentation Manager can be accessed.

 Options Group Box

 The Options group box contains two check boxes that allow you to set
 additional message box controls.

  Help          This option is set to OFF by default. With this option set to
                on, a "Help" button will be added to the existing Reply Button
                combination. This is to provide the user with extended help
                information on why or what the message box may be indicating.
  Moveable      This option is set to ON by default. This option provides a
                title bar to the message box. This allows the user to move the
                message box around the Presentation Manager desktop by dragging
                it with the mouse.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you have completed any changes in the Message Box
                Object dialog window.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the message box appearance, you will have to run the Animate mode of
           Gpf to view the changes. Refer to the Toolkit Pull-down section for
           information on the Animate function (Chapter 3.10).

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Scroll bar
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your message box. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key or "Help" button when you finally
                run your compiled application.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                message box window.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this message box window, as  well
           as any children of the message box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 21. Dlg Presentation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Presentation Object (ALT+B,P)

Clicking on the Object Presentation Object (ALT+B,P) pull-down action will
invoke the Presentation Parameter List dialog window.

A Presentation Object allows you to define any combination of specific font,
foreground, background, or border color, as an object. This object can then be
applied when creating other windows or controls when a custom presentation is
desired.

For example, consider the use of different font sizes for menu pull-down
actions, dialog window text, or list box items.

The Presentation Parameter List dialog window contains a list of all currently
defined Presentation Objects for the current application definition. Once
defined, such objects can be invoked from the 'Presentation' list boxes
contained in most control\dialog definition screens.  The following will
describe adding, editing, or deleting Presentation objects:

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Presentation Parameter List dialog window.
 View/Modify    Click on this button (ALT+V) to display or modify any defined
                presentation objects. The current selection in the dialog list
                will be chosen for this operation. This will invoke the
                Presentation Object Parameters dialog window for modifying the
                selected object. The Presentation Object Parameters dialog
                window is described in the following section.
 Add            Clicking on the Add (ALT+A) button will invoke the Presentation
                Object Parameters dialog window for defining the controls of
                the new presentation object.

 Presentation Object Parameters Dialog Window

 The Presentation Object Parameters dialog window contains combination boxes,
 entry fields, and pushbuttons to assist you in defining the presentation
 object. Each of the controls will be described below:

 Name

 Each presentation object has an identifying name. During the Gpf edit session,
 when you are setting a presentation object to a particular window, menu, or
 other control, this name will appear in the Presentation combination box of
 the particular control setting dialog.

 By default Gpf will insert a Name for you:

           PresParmsx

 where x is the sequential number of the next presentation object to be
 defined. Generally speaking, you should probably edit this field to a more
 useful name, such as "BlueListBox" or "LargeRedFont".

 Font Name Size

 The Font Names Size control is a combination box which will list all the
 different sized fonts that Gpf finds installed on your system. You can select
 a font and font size for the current presentation object from this list.

 To display the list with the mouse, click on the downward pointing arrow to
 the right of the entry field portion of the combination box. While holding the
 mouse button down, drag the highlight selector through the font names in the
 list. Release the mouse button to select the current highlighted font.

 To display the list with the keyboard, first use the TAB key to move the focus
 to the Font Named Size combination box, then press ALT+DOWNARROW. You can then
 use the keyboard cursor keys to move the highlight selector through the list.
 To make a font selection, use the RIGHTARROW key when the highlight selector
 is on the font of your choice.

 As you move the highlight selector, a sample of the font will be displayed in
 both the Font Sample and Overpaint display windows. These windows are located
 at the bottom of the Presentation Object Parameters dialog window. If the list
 of fonts is being displayed you will not be able to view the Overpaint display
 window.

 Background Color

 The Background Color control is a combination box which lists the available
 background colors available for the presentation object.

 To list the available background colors with the mouse or keyboard, follow the
 instructions as explained in the Font Named Size description above.

 As you move the highlight selector, a sample of the background color will be
 displayed in the Font Sample display windows.

 Foreground Color

 The Foreground Color control is a combination box which lists the available
 foreground colors available for the presentation object.

 To list the available foreground colors with the mouse or keyboard, follow the
 instructions as explained in the Font Named Size description above.

 As you move the highlight selector, a sample of the foreground color will be
 displayed in the Font Sample display windows.

 Background Hilite

 Selects the background color attribute for a selected item.

 Foreground Hilite

 Selects the foreground color attribute for a selected item.

 Background Disabled

 Selects the background color attribute for the disabled state of an item.

 Foreground Disabled

 Selects the foreground color attribute for the disabled state of an item.

 Border  Color

 The Border Color control is a combination box which lists the border colors
 available for the presentation object.

 To list the available border colors with the mouse or keyboard, follow the
 instructions as explained in the Font Named Size description above.

 As you move the highlight selector, a sample of the border color will be
 displayed in both the Font Sample display windows.

 Font Sample Display

 The Font Sample Display window is where the presentation object definition can
 be displayed. This enables you to test a multitude of selections before saving
 the Presentation Object definition.

 Overpaint Display

 The Overpaint Display window is where the presentation object definition can
 be displayed. This enables you to test a multitude of selections before saving
 the Presentation Object definition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22. Dlg App Program Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Properties Pull-down Action

At any time during your Gpf edit session you can modify the Program Properties
as described in the File New Pull-down Action section.

When you choose File Properties (ALT+F,P), Gpf displays the Program Properties
dialog window as shown in Figure 3-4. From this dialog window you can modify
the name of the main source code file that will be generated by Gpf, the
version or revision number of the definition, copyright information,
Presentation Manager task list entry, the target programming language, what SQL
databases are to be used by the new application, as well as text to display for
the application help windows.

Main Source Name

In this field specify the name of the source code file, and all supporting
files needed for compilation, that will be generated by Gpf when you are ready
to compile a Gpf defined application. The name entered here does not have to be
the same as the name specified as the Gpf definition file, but the naming
convention guidelines are the same.

Actually Gpf will limit you to entering a maximum of eight characters without
an extension. Gpf will automatically generate the extension based on the target
language used and whether or not SQL data bases will be accessed.

Examples of Gpf generated source code files:

 FIRSTONE.C     C   Source code generated by Gpf
 FIRSTONE.SQC   SQL embedded C source code generated by Gpf

 Level

 Gpf allows you to track the number of revisions you may make to the
 application definition through the Level field. For example, if you have made
 minor modifications you may want to change the Level number from 1.0 to 1.1.
 You can enter any combination of letters, numbers, or punctuation marks.

 The maximum length for the Level field is four (4) characters.

 Copyright

 The copyright field can be used to enter the name of the person or company
 that will hold the copyright of the application being generated. The text that
 is entered here will be placed in the generated source code, as well as the
 other supporting compilation files generated by Gpf.

 The maximum length for the Copyright field is sixty-three (63) characters.

 Task List Title

 The Task List title is entered into the Presentation Manager Task List box
 when the compiled Gpf application is actually running.  Users can move between
 active applications running under OS/2 by selecting a name from the task list.
 A short, descriptive, line of text is recommended for this entry.

 The maximum length for the Task List Title field is sixty-three (63)
 characters.

 Language

 The Language field is actually what is known as a Presentation Manager
 combination box. A combination box looks like an entry field with the
 exception that there is a downward-pointing arrow control on the far right
 side. By clicking this down arrow, a list of possible entries will be
 displayed. You can then choose an item from the list to fill in the top part
 of the combination box. You cannot enter text directly into the field for this
 combination box.

 Currently Gpf generates only 'C' language source code, subsequently it is the
 only available option for the Language field.

 Database Name

 The Database Name field is another combination box where you can choose which,
 if any, SQL databases are to be referenced in the current Gpf application
 being defined. When you start the Gpf editor, a search is automatically
 conducted to determine if there are any SQL databases available on your
 system.  Gpf will then fill the Database Name list with the results of the
 search.

 If  your application does not need to access information from an SQL database
 you can choose the 'No DBM' option, which is also the default.  You cannot
 enter text directly into the field for this combination box.

 OK             By clicking on the OK button (ALT+O) you will signal Gpf that
                you have completed any modifications in the Program Properties
                dialog window. Gpf will check the Program Properties dialog
                window and display an error message if there are any problems
                with your entries. Another way to signal Gpf that you want to
                save the changes you have made is by pressing the ENTER key.
 ACTION         The ACTION dialogs permit association of system or code
                functions with current circumstances, control manipulations,
                initializations, and so on. In the case of the Program
                Properties window, you will see two default circumstances for
                which actions can be invoked: Init Application and End
                Application. This permits specification of items which are to
                be performed upon program start and end.

 Please refer to Common Dialog Windows, section 3.10.3, for a detailed
 explanation of the Action dialog window.

 Entry Extended Help By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Program
                Properties dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your application. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Manager if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the application
           from the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section  for a detailed explanation
 of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.1. Dlg Properties Source Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Main Source Name

In this field you specify the name of the source code file that will be
generated by Gpf when you are ready to compile a Gpf defined application. The
name entered here does not have to be the same as the name specified for the
Gpf definition file, but the naming convention guidelines are the same.

Actually Gpf will limit you to entering a maximum of eight characters without
an extension. Gpf will automatically generate the extension based on the target
language used and whether or not you specify that SQL data bases will be
accessed.

For example, if you have named your main source file as FIRSTONE Gpf will
generate the following files:

 File Name           Contents

 FIRSTONE.C          C source code generated by Gpf, or
 FIRSTONE.SQC        SQL embedded C source code generated by Gpf.
 FIRSTONE.RC         Resource Statements
 FIRSTONE.IDS        Constant definitions
 FIRSTONE.MAK        Make File
 FIRSTONE.CMD        Automatic compiler call batch file.

 This field is the only required field for continuing with the New Application
 Definition; Gpf will not allow you to proceed if you leave this field blank.
 This holds true even if you attempt to CANCEL the Program Properties dialog.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.2. Dlg Properties Level ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Level

Gpf allows you to track the revision number of the application definition
through the Level field. By default, Gpf will set the level at '1.0' when you
create a new application definition. You can enter any combination of letters,
numbers, or punctuation marks.

The maximum length for the Level field is four (4) characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.3. Dlg Properties Copyright ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Copyright

The copyright field can be used to enter the name of the person or company that
will hold the copyright of the application being generated. The text that is
entered here will be placed in the generated source code, as well as the other
supporting compilation files generated by Gpf.

The maximum length for the Copyright field is sixty-three (63) characters.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.4. Dlg Properties TaskList ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Task List Title

The Task List title is the string of text that gets entered into the
Presentation Manager Task List box when the compiled Gpf application is
actually running.  Users can move between active applications running under
OS/2 by selecting a name from the Task List. A short, descriptive, line of text
is recommended for this entry.

The maximum length for the Task List Title field is 63 characters.

FCF_TASKLIST When this flag is set, the program title is added to the front of
the frame window text.  The resulting string is used as the window title and is
also entered on the task list. In this context, the program title is the text
string used by the Desktop Manager to identify the program, or the text string
specified as a parameter in the START command.  If neither               string
has been defined, the filename and extension of the .EXE file are used as the
program title.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.5. Dlg Properties Language ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Language

The Language field is actually what is known as a Presentation Manager
combination box. A combination box looks like an entry field with the exception
that there is a downward-pointing arrow control on the far right side. By
clicking this down arrow, a list of possible entries will be displayed. You can
then choose an item from the list to fill in the top part of the combination
box. You cannot enter text directly into the field for this combination box.

Currently Gpf generates only 'C' language source code, subsequently it is the
only available option for the Language field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.6. Dlg Properties DataBase Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Database Name

The Database Name field is another combination box where you can choose which,
if any, SQL databases are to be referenced in the current Gpf application being
defined. When you start the Gpf editor, a search is automatically conducted to
determine if there are any SQL databases available on your system.  Gpf will
then fill the Database Name list with the results of the search.

If your application does not need to access information from an SQL database
you can choose the 'No DBM' option, which is also the default.  You cannot
enter text directly into the field for this combination box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.7. Dlg Properties Ok ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 OK                  By clicking on the OK button (ALT+O), or pressing the
                     ENTER key, you will signal Gpf that you are ready to
                     create the first window of your application definition.
                     Gpf will check the Program Properties dialog window and
                     display the appropriate error message if there are any
                     problems with your entries.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.8. Dlg Properties EntryHelp ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 Entry Extended Help By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Program
                     Properties dialog window, you will be able to define the
                     general help text for your application.  The text that you
                     enter will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help
                     Manager if the user presses the F1 key when you ultimately
                     run your compiled application.

           You can also define an informational message for the application
           from the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows  section for a detailed explanation
 of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 22.9. Dlg Properties Action ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 ACTION              Pressing the ACTION button will call up a set of screens
                     from which you can define what is to occur upon program
                     start and program end.

 Please refer to Common Dialog Windows,  section 3.10.3, for a detailed
 explanation of the ACTION dialog window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23. Dlg NewFile and SaveAs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File New Pull-down Action

When you select the File New (ALT+F,N) action, you are indicating to Gpf that
you want to create a new Gpf definition.

Gpf definitions is where Gpf saves all the controls and windows that you create
for your application within the editing session. It is from this definition
file that Gpf generates the C language source code and supporting files for
compilation. The definition files are in a binary format, and are readable only
by the Gpf system utilities.

If you do not have a definition loaded in the current editing session, Gpf will
automatically display the Create New Application dialog window as shown in
Figure 3-1. Otherwise Gpf will query you to save the definition before
continuing.  If you have made changes to the definition and have not saved
them, it is a good idea to save it now because your changes will be lost if you
reply NO to the "Save the current file?" option.

You are now ready to create a new application definition.

Creating a new application definition is a two step process:

           1. Name the definition and identify what drive/directory to record
           it in

           2. Specify the program properties of the new definition.

 Naming the New Application Definition File

 The New Application dialog window will allow you to define the name of the new
 definition file as well as identifying which drive and directory to store it
 in. Each of the controls in the File New Dialog Window will be explained
 below:

 File Name

 When the dialog windows appears, specify the name that you want to save the
 Gpf definition to in this entry field.

 When naming a definition, follow these guidelines:

           The file name can be no longer than eight characters long. Gpf will
           automatically add an identifying three- character extension unless
           you add one yourself. Gpf's default extension is '.ORC'.

           If desired, you can add other extensions by typing a period, and
           then the extension-for example, FIRSTONE.TST. Files with extensions
           other than .ORC don't appear in the Files box in the File Open
           dialog window. You must explicitly state the extension that you
           added during future sessions when you open a file using a non-ORC
           extension.

           You can use any characters in a filename except spaces and the
           following characters:

           * ? . , ; [ ] +  =  \ : |

 Directory is :

 This is a read-only field which informs you where the file named above will be
 stored. You can change the directory from the Directories list box, and change
 the drive using the icons at the top of the window.

 If you decide to save the definition on a different drive or directory,
 remember where you placed it for later retrieval.

 OK             Once you have filled in the File Name field and have chosen the
                drive and directory where you will place the new definition,
                you can signal Gpf that you are ready to begin by selecting the
                OK (ALT+O) button. Another way to signal Gpf to begin is by
                pressing the ENTER key.

           Gpf will append the .ORC extension to the name that you have
           specified in the File Name entry field if you have not specified
           your own extension. A  search for the filename specified is then
           conducted to insure that the new file name is indeed unique. If Gpf
           finds another file of the name specified in the working directory
           you will be presented with an error message.  You are then given the
           option to overwrite the existing file.  If you do not want to
           destroy an existing file, you can cancel the overwrite and use a
           different name in the File Name entry field.

 CANCEL         If you wish to cancel the operation at anytime during the
                naming of the New Gpf definition, click on the CANCEL button in
                the dialog window. This will signal Gpf that you do not want to
                continue and you will be returned to the Gpf session window.
                Another way to signal Gpf that you want to cancel the current
                operation is by pressing the ESC key.
 HELP           Clicking on the HELP button will invoke the Presentation
                Manager Help Facility. The Help window will provide you with
                information on options available for creating a New Application
                definition.

 New Application Program Properties

 Once you have given your new application definition a valid file name and have
 elected to continue creating the definition, Gpf will display the Program
 Property dialog window as shown in Figure 3-2.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.1. Dlg NewFile / SaveAs Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Name

When the dialog windows appears, specify the name that you want to save the Gpf
definition to in this entry field.

When naming a definition, follow these uidelines:

           The file name can be no longer than eight characters long. Gpf will
           automatically add an identifying three  character extension unless
           you add one yourself. Gpf's default extension is '.ORC'.

           If desired, you can add other extensions by typing a period, and
           then the extension-for example, FIRSTONE.TST. Files with extensions
           other than '.ORC' don't appear in the Files box in the File Open
           dialog window. You must explicitly state the extension that you
           added during future sessions when you open a file using a non-ORC
           extension.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.2. Dlg NewFile / SaveAs Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directory is :

This is a read-only field which informs you where the file named above will be
stored. You can change the directory from the Directories list box, and change
the drive using the icons at the top of the window.

If you decide to save the definition on a different drive or directory,
remember where you placed it for later retrieval.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.3. Dlg NewFile / SaveAs OK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 OK             Once you have filled in the File Name field and have chosen the
                drive and directory where you will place the new definition,
                you can signal Gpf that you are ready to begin by selecting the
                OK (ALT+O) button. Another way to signal Gpf to begin is by
                pressing the ENTER key.

           Gpf will append the '.ORC' extension to the name that you have
           specified in the File Name entry field if you have not specified
           your own extension. A search for the filename specified is then
           conducted to insure that the new file name is indeed unique. If Gpf
           finds another file of the name specified in the working directory
           you will be presented with an error message.  You are then given the
           option to overwrite the existing file.  If you do not want to
           destroy an existing file, you can cancel the overwrite and use a
           different name in the File Name entry field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.4. Dlg NewFile / SaveAs Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 CANCEL         If you wish to cancel the operation at anytime during the
                naming of the New Gpf definition, click on the CANCEL button in
                the dialog window. This will signal Gpf that you do not want to
                continue and you will be returned to the Gpf session window.
                Another way to signal Gpf that you want to cancel the current
                operation is by pressing the ESC key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 23.5. Dlg NewFile / SaveAs Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 HELP           Clicking on the HELP button will invoke the Presentation
                Manager Help Facility. The Help window will provide you with
                information on options available for creating a New Application
                definition.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24. Dlg Scroll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Create Horizontal Scroll Bar (ALT+C,H)

Clicking on the Create Horizontal Scroll Bar (ALT+C,H) action will generate a
horizontal scroll bar control and allow you to attach it to any visible window.
Once the control is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will
invoke the Scroll Bar Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-15.

Scroll bars are controls that take mouse and keyboard input and generate
notification messages to the owner window. Applications typically use scroll
bars to scroll the contents of a client window.

As shown, the Scroll Bar Control Styles dialog window consists of entry fields,
combination boxes, check boxes, and pushbuttons. Some of these controls are
located in group boxes and will be noted in the following descriptions:

Name

Each scroll bar control has an identifying name. During program execution, the
application's window procedure receives messages generated by the scroll bar in
response to user input. The application responds to these messages by using
this identifier of the scroll bar control.

OS/2 Presentation Manager also has a set of functions which can manipulate the
slider portion and the active/inactive state of the scroll bar control by using
the Name identifier as an argument to OS/2 API functions.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the scroll bar
currently being defined.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size as well as the
foreground, background, and border colors of the scroll bar control.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (section 3.10) for information on
defining presentation objects.

Control Styles Group Box

The Control Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set the
style for the current control.

Check boxes are considered to be set to on when a small 'x' appears in the
check box. Each of the control styles are defined as follows:

  Horizontal Scroll Bar This option is set to on by default. Setting this
                option to off will cause the created Horizontal Scroll Bar to
                change appearance to a Vertical Scroll Bar.
  Thumb Size    This option is set to off by default. With this option set to
                on, the scroll bar slider will change its height to reflect the
                percentage of data visible and thus the percentage of the
                scroll bar that the slider should occupy.
  Auto Track    ** currently undefined

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current scroll bar control. Typically these options are
 used for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the scroll bar control will act as an encapsulated group. It
                will receive the keyboard or mouse focus. The group style
                remains in effect until the next control with a style such as
                this is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to on by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will receive the focus when the user presses
                the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal  Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Scroll Bar Control Styles dialog window.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the scroll bar control appearance, Gpf will automatically update the
           control to reflect those changes.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Scroll bar
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (section 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                scroll bar control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this Scroll bar control, as well as
           any children of this scroll bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.1. HORZSCRBAR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These scroll bar control styles are available:

SBS_HORZ

 Create a horizontal scroll bar.

SBS_VERT

 Create a vertical scroll bar.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.2. THUMBSIZE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

These scroll bar control styles are available:

SBS_SETTHUMBSIZE

 Indicates the presence of the visible and total parameters in the SBCDATA data
structure.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.3. DlgScrollGroup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_GROUP

 This identifies the dialog items that make up a `group'.

 This style should be specified on the first window of any group. Subsequent
windows of the group must not have this style. The windows of the group must be
adjacent siblings. This can be done by listing the windows consecutively in
templates or by inserting each new window in the group behind the previous one
(WinCreateWindow).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 24.4. DlgScrollTabStop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_TABSTOP

 This identifies a dialog item as one to which the operator can TAB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 25. Dlg Find PM Control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object Find PM Control  (ALT+B,F)

The Gpf Find PM Control function is a control management utility.  With the
Find PM Control dialog box you can search for or destroy controls (e.g.
Buttons, List Boxes, Icons) defined in windows.

Clicking on the Find PM Control (ALT+B,F) pull-down action will invoke the
Search Object dialog window. All currently visible Gpf application windows will
be dismissed from view when this dialog box is invoked.

Search Object Dialog Window

The Search Object dialog window contains a list of all windows defined in the
current application. For each defined window there is also a list of controls
associated with the window. The following is a description of each of the
available options in the dialog window:

Window List Box

The Window list box contains a list of all windows created in the current
application definition. By default the Main Window, or whatever you may have
named it, will always be listed first in this list.

Selecting a window from this list will cause Gpf to search through and display
any of the controls or objects, associated with the selection in the Object
list box.

Object List Box

The Object list box lists all of the controls and objects associated with the
currently selected window in the Window list box.

 SEARCH         Clicking on the SEARCH button will cause Gpf to search for and
                display the window that contains the currently selected object.
                If found, the window owning the object will be brought to the
                foreground, and the target object will be highlighted.  This
                will also dismiss the Search Object dialog window.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button or pressing the ESC key will
                signal Gpf that you want to dismiss the Search Object dialog
                window.
 DESTROY        Clicking on the DESTROY button (ALT+D), will cause Gpf to
                remove the currently selected object. You will first be
                prompted to confirm that you want to destroy the object as well
                as any children of the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 26. Dlg SelMenu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The upper section of this window is a read-only list of existing menu items at
this level. The left section of each line is the item logical name, while on
the right is the text which will appear in the menu. A tilde (~) character
depicts the item HOT key.

Press on the following controls:

 Ok        when done
 View/Modify to edit or examine existing entries
 Add ActionBar to insert an item. It will be placed AFTER the highlighted item.
 Destroy   to delete an item


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 27. Dlg Pulldown List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The upper section of this screen is a read-only list of defined items in this
PullDown. The operation of this screen is identical to the menu creation
screen. See the Dlg SelMenu  entry in Help Contents.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 28. Dlg Statistic ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Option Statistics (ALT+O,S)

Each time you create a window, control, or object, you are using some of the
available Presentation Manager resources. Under versions 1.1 and 1.2 of OS/2
Presentation Manager, there are a limited number of resources available.

Gpf keeps track of how many resources of each type are being used by your
current application definition. With the Option Statistics (ALT+O,S) pull-down,
you can view the current state of resource consumption.

Clicking on the Option Statistics pull-down action (ALT+O,S) will invoke the
Statistics Dialog Window. This dialog window, and the resource indicators are
described as follows:

Statistics Dialog Window

The Statistics dialog window is a read-only group of identifiers which indicate
the current state of application definition resource usage. As a read-only
dialog window, you will not be able to modify any of the values displayed. This
dialog is for informational purposes only. Here are each of the identifiers:

 Window         This indicates the number of windows or dialog windows
                currently defined for the application. By default this value
                will be 1 for the main window.
 Control        This indicates the number of controls (i.e. Buttons, Static
                Text, List Boxes, etc.) currently defined in the application.
 Menu           This indicates the total number of menu elements defined for
                the current application. Menu elements include both the high
                level menu bar items, as well as any pull-down or submenu
                items.
 Help           This indicates the number of Entry Help descriptions defined
                for the current application.
 SQL            This indicates the number of SQL associations defined in the
                current application. A SQL association is where you associate a
                control (e.g. List Box, Combobox, Entry Field) with an SQL
                table.column name.
 Action         This indicates how many actions have been defined for any
                existing windows, menus, or other controls in the current
                application.
 Source         This field indicates the number of source code files that have
                been identified in the current application. When you create a
                new window or dialog window, you have the option of having the
                source code generated to a file different than the main source
                file.
 Threads        This indicates the number of threads that have been identified
                in the current application. When you create a new window or
                dialog window, you have the option of creating a separate
                thread of execution for each one.
 Icon Bitmap    This indicates the number of Icon/Bitmap/Pointer objects that
                have been defined in the current application.
 Message Box    This field indicates the number of Message Box objects that
                have been defined in the current application.
 Presentation   This field indicates the number of Presentation objects that
                have been defined in the current application.
 User Text      This field indicates the number of User Function objects that
                have been defined in the current application.
 Resource Usage Graphic The Resource Usage graphic is a bar graph showing the
                ratio of the amount of resources used to the total number of
                resources available.

 For OS/2 1.2 Extended Edition, the total number of available resources is set
 at 8192. The resource usage field is calculated by:

           THE_NUMBER_OF_USED_RESOURCE / 8192

 where THE_NUMBER_OF_USED_RESOURCE is the sum total of the resource indicators.

 The Resource Usage graph itself is broken into 25% quarters, where the current
 resource usage will be graphed.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you are through looking at the Statistics dialog
                window.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29. Dlg Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

*******************************

This dialog contains one or more of the following keys. Double-click on the key
for which you need Help.  Action Associate Cancel Destroy EntryHelp Help Ok
View/Modify...

Create Text Static (ALT+C,T)

Clicking on the Create Text Static (ALT+C,T) action will generate a static text
control item and allow you to attach it to any visible window. Once the control
is placed on the target window or dialog window, Gpf will invoke the Static
Control Styles dialog window. Refer to Figure 3-8.

Static controls are simple text fields, bitmaps, or icons that can be used to
label, enclose, or separate other window control windows. Static controls do
not accept user input and they do not send notification messages to their
owning applications.

As shown, the Static Control Styles dialog window consists of a number of entry
fields, combination boxes, check boxes, radio buttons, and push buttons. Some
of these controls are located in group boxes and will be noted in the following
descriptions:

Name

Each static text control item has an identifying name. During program
execution, the application's window procedure can manipulate the item using
this name as an argument to the OS/2 Presentation Manager API functions.

Sibling

The Sibling control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose which control item or window will be a sibling of the item currently
being defined.

Text

The Text control is an entry field where you can type in the text associated
with the currently created item.

Item definitions where text entries are ignored will be identified at the
appropriate control item description.

Presentation

The Presentation control is a combination box which displays and allows you to
choose a presentation object for setting the font size, foreground, background,
and border colors for the static control being defined.

The Presentation object must have been previously identified as an object to
Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter 3.5) for information on
defining presentation objects.

Static Control Styles Group Box

The Static Control Styles group box contains a number of radio buttons that
define  what type of control the newly created item is.

Radio buttons in a group box are mutually exclusive, only one can be set to on
in the group at one time. Each of the control styles are described as follows:

 Text           This option is set to on by default. With the control style of
                Text, various formatting options are available to produce
                formatted text in the boundaries of the control. The text
                entered in the text entry field control is displayed. Refer to
                the discussions of Horizontal and Vertical Options following
                this (Static Control Styles Group Box) section.
 Group Box      This option is set to off by default. Group boxes are useful
                for grouping other kinds of control items, such as radio
                buttons and check boxes. The text entered in the text entry
                field control is displayed in the upper left corner of the
                group box when displayed in the application or dialog window.
 ForeGround Frame This option is set to off by default. A control with this
                style is drawn as a rectangular frame with the current
                foreground color. Any text entered in the Text entry field is
                ignored with this option.
 BackGround Frame This option is set to off by default. A control with this
                style draws a filled rectangle with the current background
                color. Any text entered in the Text entry field is ignored with
                this option.
 Half Tone Frame This option is set to off by default. Half tone frames  draw a
                rectangular frame with a halftone pattern in the current
                foreground color. Any text entered in the Text entry field is
                ignored with this option.

 Icon           This option is set to off by default. Click on this style if
                you want to display an icon on the application or dialog
                window. The icon must have been previously identified as an
                object to Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull- down section (Chapter
                3.5) for information on defining icon objects.
 Bitmaps        This option is set to off by default. Click on this style if
                you want to display a bitmap on the application or dialog
                window. The bitmap must have been previously identified as an
                object to Gpf. Refer to the Objects Pull-down section (Chapter
                3.5) for information on defining bitmap objects.

 If either Icon or Bitmap is selected as a style, the Icon/Bitmap combination
 box will become active with a list of defined Icon/Bitmap objects. Selecting
 an object from the combination box will also fill in the Icon/Bitmap view box
 located to the right of the Icon and Bitmap style radio button.

 ForeGround Rect This option is set to off by default. This style draws a
                rectangle filled with the current foreground color. Any text
                entered in the Text entry field is ignored with this option.
 BackGround Rect This option is set to off by default. This style draws a
                rectangle filled with the current background color. Any text
                entered in the Text entry field is ignored with this option.
 Half Tone Rect This option is set to off by default. This style will draw a
                rectangle filled with a halftone pattern with the current
                foreground color. Any text entered in the Text entry field is
                ignored with this option.

 Horz Options Group Box

 The horizontal placement of the text in the Text field entry is controlled by
 the options in this group box. These options are only available if the style
 for the static control is marked Text.

 Being radio button options, the horizontal controls are mutually exclusive.

 Left Aligned   This option is set to on by default. Setting the Left Aligned
                option will draw the text entered in the text entry field flush
                left with the text box border.
 Horizontal Centered This option is set to off by default. This option will
                center the text between the left and right boundaries of the
                text box.
 Right Aligned  This option is set to off by default. Setting the Right Aligned
                option will draw the text entered in the text entry field flush
                right with the text box border.

 Vert Options Group Box

 The vertical placement of the text in the Text field entry is controlled by
 the options in this group box. As with the horizontal controls, the style of
 the static control must be set at Text.

 Being radio button options, the vertical controls are mutually exclusive.

 Top Aligned    This option is set to off by default. The Top Aligned option
                will draw the text entered in the Text entry field, starting in
                the top line of the text box.
 Vert Centered  This option is set to on by default. Vertical centering will
                align the text between the top and bottom borders of the text
                box. This is typically used for single line text entries.
 Bottom Aligned This option is set to off by default.  This option will draw
                the text entered in the Text entry field, starting along the
                bottom border of the text box.

 Text Options Group Box

 The Text Options group box contains a number of check boxes that will effect
 the overall appearance of your text.

 Check boxes are considered to turn on the related style when there is an 'X'
 in the check box itself. If the check box is empty, Gpf will not generate the
 option for the text. Each of the styles available will be described.

  Word Wrap     This option is set to off by default. Click on this option if
                the text entry extends for more than one line, or if the text
                box is too small. Word wrap will automatically wrap the text to
                fit into the defined text box boundary.
  Half Tone     This option is set to off by default. Setting this option on
                will display the text in a halftone pattern with the current
                text color.

 Dialog Styles Group Box

 The Dialog Styles group box contains a number of check boxes that will set
 characteristics of the current static control. Typically these options are
 used for defining characteristics of a control in dialog windows.

  Group         This option is set to on by default. With this style set to on,
                the static control will act as the first member of a number of
                other controls in a group.  It will also be able to receive the
                keyboard or mouse focus. The group style remains in effect
                until the next control with a style such as this is found.
  Tabstop       This option is set to off by default. This style is typically
                used in conjunction with the Group style. When set to on, the
                current control will be able to receive the focus when the user
                presses the TAB key to move between dialog controls.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the
                Static Control Styles dialog window and save your changes.

           If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to
           the controls appearance, Gpf will automatically update the control
           to reflect those changes.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                cause Gpf to abort the current operation .

           If you have changed any options for the control while in the Static
           Control Styles dialog window, Gpf will ignore the changes and
           restore the original control settings.

 ENTRY HELP     By clicking the Entry Extended Help (ALT+E) in the Static
                Control Styles dialog window, you will be able to define the
                general help text for your control. The text that you enter
                will be displayed by the Presentation Manager Help Facility if
                the user presses the F1 key when you finally run your compiled
                application.

           You can also define an informational message for the control from
           the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 Please refer to the Common Dialog Windows section (Chapter 3.10) for a
 detailed explanation of the Entry Extended Help dialog window.

 ACTION         Because static controls do not allow user input, the ACTION
                button is disabled.
 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove the
                static control.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this control, as well as any
           children of this control.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.1. TEXT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

SS_TEXT

 Creates a text field.  The text is formatted before it is displayed according
to the setting of these text drawing-style flags:

 Flag                   Meaning
 DT_LEFT                Left-justified text
 DT_CENTER              Centered text
 DT_RIGHT               Right-justified text

     ORed with one of:

 Flag                   Meaning
 DT_TOP                 Text is aligned to top of window
 DT_VCENTER             Text is aligned vertically in center of window
 DT_BOTTOM              Text is aligned to bottom of window

 The following text drawing style can also be ORed, but only if DT_TOP and
 DT_LEFT are also specified:

 DT_WORDBREAK           Text is multi-line with word-wrapping at ends of lines.

 Programming Note  For "static" text that can be selected, a Button Control
 with a style of BS_NOBORDER can be used.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.2. GROUPBOX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

SS_GROUPBOX

 A group box static control is a box that has an identifying text string in its
upper left corner.  Group boxes are used to collect a group of radio buttons or
other controls into a single unit.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.3. FGNDFRAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

SS_FGNDFRAME

 Creates a box with a foreground color frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.4. BKGNDFRAME ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

SS_BKGNDFRAME

 Creates a box with a background color frame.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.5. ICON ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

SS_ICON

 Draws an icon.  The text of the static control is a string that is used to
derive the resource ID from which the icon is loaded. The format of the string
is:

 o The first byte is X'FF', the second byte is the low byte of the resource ID,
   and the third byte is the high byte of the resource ID.

 o The first character is "#"; subsequent characters make up the decimal text
   representation of the resource ID.

  This format can be used for specifying a system icon in a resource file. The
 decimal string is the value of the appropriate SPTR_* constant.

  If the string is empty or does not follow the format above, no resource is
 loaded.

  The resource is assumed to reside in the resource file of the current
 process.

  This control is resized to the size of the icon.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.6. BITMAPS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

SS_BITMAP

 Draws a bit map.  The text of the static control names the bit-map resource,
as for SS_ICON.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.7. FGNDRECT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

SS_FGNDRECT

 Creates a foreground color-filled rectangle.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.8. BKGNDRECT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

SS_BKGNDRECT

 Creates a background color-filled rectangle.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.9. TEXTLEFT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

 DT_LEFT   Left-justified text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.10. TEXTCENTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

 DT_CENTER Centered text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.11. TEXTRIGHT ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

 DT_RIGHT Right-justified text


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.12. TOP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

 DT_TOP     Text is aligned to top of window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.13. VCENTER ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

 DT_VCENTER Text is aligned vertically in center of window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.14. BOTTOM ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

 DT_BOTTOM Text is aligned to bottom of window


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.15. WORDBREAK ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Static controls can have these styles:

 DT_WORDBREAK

 Text is multi-line with word-wrapping at ends of lines.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.16. DlgTextGroup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_GROUP

 This identifies the dialog items that make up a `group'.

 This style should be specified on the first window of any group. Subsequent
windows of the group must not have this style. The windows of the group must be
adjacent siblings. This can be done by listing the windows consecutively in
templates or by inserting each new window in the group behind the previous one
(WinCreateWindow).


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 29.17. DlgTextTabStop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Styles for Windows in Dialogs

WS_TABSTOP

 This identifies a dialog item as one to which the operator can TAB.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 30. Dlg Actions List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Action List Definition Dialog Window

The Action List Definition dialog window is where you select from a number of
predefined actions and associations. The dialog window itself contains three
(3) list boxes:

 Actions        Contains a list of all Gpf predefined actions that perform some
                action to either a window, control, menu item, or object. For
                example, if the action in the Action list is a menu action,
                then the Window list box will disappear and the Object list box
                will contain all the menu and pull-down objects currently
                defined. Each action, and the effect any action may have on the
                contents of the other list boxes, will be described below.
 Windows        Contains a list of all windows or dialog windows in your
                application definition. Many of the actions selected from the
                Action list work on a window selected here. If a selected
                action does not effect a window this list box will not be
                displayed.
 Objects        Contains a list of objects (i.e. Controls, Menus, User
                Functions ) that an action may directly effect. If the selected
                action in the Action list does not effect an object, this list
                will not be displayed or will display empty.

 Gpf Predefined Action List

 The following is a list of available actions as predefined by Gpf. A brief
 description of the action, as well as the target object for the action, will
 be provided.

 This list contain actions typically performed to another window, which can be
 selected in the Window list box.

 Window Show (Visible) When selected this action will cause the target window
                to display itself on the screen.
 Window Dismiss (Invisible) This action will cause the target window to dismiss
                itself from the screen. The window in effect hides itself.
 Window Focus   This will cause the target window to obtain the keyboard and
                mouse input focus. This in effect switches the active window
                during the application run.
 Window Enable  This action will cause the target window to become enabled. If
                the target window is already enabled this action will have no
                effect.
 Window Disable This action will cause the target window to become disabled. If
                the target window is already disabled this action will have no
                effect.
 Window Center Screen This action will cause the target window to center itself
                on the screen in relation to the parent window.
 Window Top Screen This action will cause the target window to align the top of
                its border with the top of the desktop screen.
 Window Max Screen This action will cause the target window to maximize itself.
                If the parent window is the DESKTOP, the application window
                will fill the entire screen, otherwise the window fills the
                parent window client area.
 Window Reset Default Button This action will cause the button defined as the
                default button to reset itself to the default button status.
                Default buttons are drawn with a heavy black border.

           NOTE: the next two items have several properties the user must be
           aware of. First, they are both reserved for SQL associations.
           Second, the code generated by GPF for these functions must NOT be
           modified, though you can ADD code. Third, they are inactive if the
           application has no associated DATABASE. Lastly, when invoked these
           functions send data back and forth between the current CONTROL and
           the "static sql area".

 Window Send Data To Window This selection will cause Gpf to generate a
                function call and empty function shell for use by the
                developer.
 Window Receive Data To Window This selection will cause Gpf to generate a
                function call and empty function shell for use by the
                developer.

 This list contains actions that effect List boxes or Combination boxes. If a
 window has any of these controls it will be listed in the Object list box.
 Select different windows from the Window list box.

 Listbox Load List/Combo Box (SQL) This action will generate the necessary SQL
                statements to fill a list box with table column headings .
 Listbox Get Selection (SQL) This action will retrieve the row associated with
                the selection in the list box.

 These actions work on controls within a window. Controls for a particular
 window, created with the Create pull-down, appear in the Objects list box with
 the window selected in the Windows list box.

 Control Show (Visible) When selected this action will cause the target control
                to display itself on the screen.
 Control Hide (Invisible) This action will cause the target control to dismiss
                itself from the screen. The Control in effect hides itself.

                Control Focus
 This will cause the target control to obtain the keyboard and mouse input
                focus. This in effect switches the active control during the
                application run.

 Control Enable This action will cause the target control to become enabled. If
                the target control is already enabled this action will have no
                effect.
 Control Disable This action will cause the target control to become disabled.
                If the target control is already disabled this action will have
                no effect.

 These actions work on buttons (Check boxes, Radio) within a window. Buttons
 for a particular window, created with the Create pull-down, appear in the
 Objects list box with the window selected in the Windows list box.

 Button Check True This action will cause the target radio or check box button
                to be changed to an on state.
 Button Check False This action will cause the target radio or check box button
                to be changed to an off state.
 Button Check Alternate This action toggles the state of the target radio or
                check box button, i.e if ON it will be turned OFF, and vice
                versa.
 Button Set Default Button This action will cause the target button to become
                the default button. Default buttons are drawn with a heavy
                black border, and are invoked if the user presses the ENTER
                key.

 These actions work on menu pull-down, pull-down lists, and submenus.  Menus
 for the window, as selected in the Windows list box, will be displayed in the
 Object list box.

 Menu Enable    This action will cause the target menu item to be enabled. When
                enabled, menu items can be selected with the mouse or keyboard.
 Menu Disable   This action will cause the target menu item to become disabled.
                When menu items are disabled they are not selectable by the
                user.
 Menu Mark      This action will place a check mark next to the target menu
                item.
 Menu Unmark    This action will remove, if previously set, a check mark next
                to the target menu item.
 Menu Swap Mark This option will alternate a check mark next to the target menu
                item.  If the menu item is checked it will be unchecked, if
                unchecked it will be checked.

 These actions will send a message directly to the target window.

 Send Did Ok    This is an OS/2 Presentation Manager predefined message for
                indicating a user has clicked on an OK button, or a button with
                a DID_OK identifier.
 Send Did Cancel This is an OS/2 Presentation Manager predefined message for
                indicating a user has clicked on a CANCEL button, or a button
                with a DID_CANCEL identifier.
 Send Text Message This action will display a message box object as defined in
                your application. A list of message box objects will appear in
                the Object list box.

 The following actions do not have any windows or objects associated with them:

 Quit Application This will cause the application to exit the system.

 The following actions will generate a help subsystem call. The Window and
 Object list boxes are removed when selecting these calls, with the exception
 of the Help for Window action.

 Help Help for Help This will issue a message to the help subsystem to display
                the general overview of using the help subsystem.
 Help Help Extended This will issue a message to display the extended help
                screens for the application.
 Help Help Index This action will issue a message to display the application
                index of help entries.

                Help Help Contents
 This action will issue a message to display a hierarchical table of contents
                for all available apllication help panels.

 Help Help Keys This action will issue a message to display all the help
                screens describing keyboard combinations for the application.
 Help Help For Window This action will display the help information for a
                specific window as selected from the Window list box.

 The following action will display a list of User Function objects in the
 Object list box.  The name of this feature is intentionally "User Function",
 as the proper way to utilize it is to create these objects in the form of
 simple function calls (refer to section 3.5.2.4 for a detailed explanation .)

 User Function  This will cause a User Function created with the Object
                pull-down action to be invoked. Gpf generates the appropriate
                source statements for these objects, placed in the appropriate
                place within the generated file. These functions MUST be
                defined prior to use, via the OBJECT pulldown of the GPF
                Editor.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 31. Dlg Associate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The upper right area, Free Columns, is a read-only list of all columns (fields)
found in the current table. Select an item from this list and press either Add,
which inserts the item in next sequential order,  or Addtop to place it at the
head of the list.

Selected items appear in the left list and, in your application, will be
written in top to bottom order.

You can highlight and remove an item from the left list with the Destroy
button.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 32. Dlg User Function Definition ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Object User Function Object (ALT+B,U)

User objects are defined source code statements or references to external
library functions that can be embedded into the Gpf application definition.

This provides a 'safe' method for inserting source code into the definition.
Source code that is entered directly into the Gpf generated source files will
be overwritten the next time a Toolkit Generate action is performed. For a
detailed description of the Gpf source generation function, refer to the
Toolkit Pull-down Actions section (Chapter 3.8) in this document.

Clicking on the Object User Function Object (ALT+B,U) pull-down action will
invoke the User Function Object List dialog window.

The User Object Function List dialog window contains a list of all currently
defined User Objects for the current application definition. The following
section will describe adding, editing, or deleting these objects.

 OK             Clicking on the OK (ALT+O) button or pressing the ENTER key
                will signal Gpf that you have completed any changes in the User
                Object Function List dialog window.
 View/Modify    Click on this button (ALT+V) to display or modify any defined
                user defined source or function objects. The current selection
                in the User Function list will be chosen for this operation.
                This will invoke the User Function Editor dialog window for
                modification of the selected object. The User Function Editor
                dialog window is described in the following section.
 Add            Clicking on the Add (ALT+A) button will invoke the User
                Function Editor dialog window for creating and editing the
                source code function object.

 The User Function Editor Dialog Window

 The User Function Editor dialog window contains an entry field, a multiple
 line entry field, and pushbuttons that allow you to define and type in source
 code comprising the User Function object.

 The User Function editor is not meant to replace high level program editors or
 word processors, but to provide you with a convenient way to insert source
 code functions into your application definition.

 Name

 Each User Function object has an identifying name. During the Gpf edit
 session, when you are applying a User Function object to a particular action,
 you would associate the action with this identifying object name.

 For information on associating User Function objects with actions, refer to
 the Common Dialog Window section (section 3.10).

 User Function Multiple LE Edit Box

 Below the Name entry field is the User Function edit box. This is where you
 can enter either a reference to a pre- existing function, or raw source code
 statements. Whatever statements are entered here will be generated into the
 source code generated from your application definition.

 Modifying any source statements here, as opposed to making changes in the
 actual source file, will insure that Gpf will not overwrite these statements.
 Gpf will overwrite any statements entered directly into the source code file
 because your additions will be unknown to both Gpf and the definition file.
 Ideally, you should save making modifications directly to the source code as
 the last step you perform before actual compilation.

 The edit box itself contains text editing features. Although they are not as
 extensive as a specialized programmers editor, it will sufficiently facilitate
 statement coding. Besides the basic features provided (i.e. Delete, Insert,
 etc...) the following controls are available:

           Cut And Paste - The standard cut and paste operations from the
           Presentation Manager clipboard are supported which allow you to copy
           source code from another file into the Gpf edit box.

           Tabs- Tab characters are supported for the purpose of indenting
           source code statements.

 OK             Clicking on the OK button or pressing the ENTER key will signal
                Gpf that you have completed any additions or changes to the
                User Function Editor dialog window.

 If any of the options you have selected will result in a change to the
 application definition file, you will have to run the Toolkit Generate action
 in Gpf to view the changes that occur in the target source code. Refer to the
 Toolkit Pull-down section (section 3.8) for information on the Generate
 function.

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button, or pressing the ESC key will
                signal Gpf that you want to dismiss the User Function Editor
                dialog window without retaining any changes you have made.
 DESTROY        By clicking on the DESTROY (ALT+D) button, you can remove this
                User Function object.

           When you select this button, Gpf will prompt you with a message to
           confirm that you want to destroy this object, as well as any
           children of the object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33. Dlg SelectFile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The File Open Pull-down Action

The next pull-down action on the File menu is the Open action.

When you choose the File Open (ALT+F,O) action, you are indicating to Gpf that
you want to open an existing application definition file.  Gpf definitions are
where Gpf saves all the controls and windows that you create for your
application. By default Gpf files have the following syntax:

filename.ORC

where filename is the eight character name that you originally assigned to the
file when it was created.

If you have a Gpf definition loaded in the current editing session, you will be
prompted to save the definition before continuing. If you have made changes to
the definition, and have not saved them, it is a good idea to save it now
because they will be lost if you reply no to the save option.

Gpf will then display the File Open dialog window, as shown in Figure 3-3. If
you did not have a Gpf definition loaded, this dialog window would have
appeared automatically.

The File Open dialog window will allow you to enter the name of the target Gpf
definition, as well as providing controls for locating other directories where
the file may be located. Each of the controls in this dialog window will be
discussed.

Directory Is

This is an informational, read only, display of the current working directory.
If you change the target drive and directory with the Directories list box,
this field will reflect the new target.

File Name

This entry field is where you can enter the name of the Gpf definition file you
want to open. This field can be filled a number of ways; either by keying in
the filename explicitly, or by making a selection from the FILES list box with
the mouse. If you choose the latter, Gpf will automatically fill the File Name
entry field with your list selection.

By default Gpf will search for all files in the current working directory that
have the following form:

*.ORC

where the '*' is the OS/2 wildcard character which means 'find all files with
the ORC extension that can contain any characters before the extension'.

Files

This list box contains all the files that Gpf has found using the file name
default pattern described above. You can use wild cards for searching file
names with extensions other than the Gpf default by entering the pattern in the
File Name field and pressing the ENTER key. The Files list box will display all
the files that it finds that match the File Name pattern.

You can select a filename from this list box by double clicking your selection.
To use the keyboard in this list box, first use the TAB key to highlight the
filename at the top of the list, and then use the UP and DOWN cursor keys to
highlight different entries. Pressing the ENTER key will automatically load the
selected entry in the Files list box.

Directories

If the file you want to open is not available in the current directory you can
select a different drive or directory from the Directories list box.

For example, if you want to load a file that has been stored to a floppy disk
using drive A:, click on the drive identifier [A:] and Gpf will automatically
search the drive with the pattern or explicit filename listed in the File Name
field.

 OK             By clicking on the OK button (ALT+O) you will signal Gpf that
                you are ready to load the current file that is listed in the
                File Name field. Gpf will check the drive and directory for
                that file's existence.  If the file does not exist, Gpf will
                notify you with a 'Requested File Not Found' message, otherwise
                the file will be loaded.  Another way to signal Gpf to load the
                file is by pressing the ENTER key.
 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button will signal to Gpf that you want
                to abort  the File Load operation and ignore the settings in
                the File Open dialog window.  Another way to signal Gpf that
                you want to cancel the current operation is by pressing the ESC
                key.

           Note that if you had saved and closed a Gpf definition when you
           invoked the File Open dialog window, that definition is still
           closed.  When you abort the File Open operation, Gpf will not have
           any definitions loaded at all.

 HELP           Clicking on the HELP button will invoke the Presentation
                Manager Help Facility. The Help window will provide you with
                information for options available when opening a Gpf definition
                file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33.1. Dlg SelectFile FileNameFilter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

File Name

This entry field is where you can enter the name of the Gpf definition file you
want to open. This field can be filled a number of ways; either by keying in
the filename explicitly, or by making a selection from the FILES list box with
the mouse. If you choose the latter, Gpf will automatically fill the File Name
entry field with your list selection.

By default Gpf will search for all files in the current working directory that
have the following form:

*.ORC

where the '*' is the OS/2 wildcard character which means 'find all files with
the ORC extension that can contain any characters before the extension'.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33.2. Dlg SelectFile Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Directories

If the file you want to open is not available in the current directory you can
select a different drive or directory from the Directories list box.

For example, if you want to load a file that has been stored to a floppy disk
using drive A:, click on the drive identifier [A:] and Gpf will automatically
search the drive with the pattern or explicit filename listed in the File Name
field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33.3. Dlg SelectFile File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Files

This list box contains all the files that Gpf has found using the file name
default pattern described above. You can use wild cards for searching file
names with extensions other than the Gpf default by entering the pattern in the
File Name field and pressing the ENTER key. The Files list box will display all
the files that it finds that match the File Name pattern.

You can select a filename from this list box by double clicking your selection.
To use the keyboard in this list box, first use the TAB key to highlight the
filename at the top of the list, and then use the UP and DOWN cursor keys to
highlight different entries. Pressing the ENTER key will automatically load the
selected entry in the Files list box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33.4. Dlg SelectFile Ok ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 OK             By clicking on the OK button (ALT+O) you will signal Gpf that
                you are ready to load the current file that is listed in the
                File Name field. Gpf will check the drive and directory for
                that file's existence.  If the file does not exist, Gpf will
                notify you with a 'Requested File Not Found' message, otherwise
                the file will be loaded.  Another way to signal Gpf to load the
                file is by pressing the ENTER key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33.5. Dlg SelectFile Cancel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 CANCEL         Clicking on the CANCEL button will signal to Gpf that you want
                to abort the File Load operation and ignore the settings in the
                File Open dialog window.  Another way to signal Gpf that you
                want to cancel the current operation is by pressing the ESC
                key.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 33.6. Dlg SelectFile Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

 HELP           Clicking on the HELP button will invoke the Presentation
                Manager Help Facility. The Help window will provide you with
                information for options available when opening a Gpf definition
                file.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34. Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Messages

 Msg001    GPF001:  Grid X Error - Enter an integer in the range 1-5.

 Msg002    GPF002:  Grid Y Error - Enter an integer in the range 1-5.

 Msg003    GPF003:  File I/O Error: Write.

 Msg004    GPF004:  File I/O Error: Read.

 Msg005    GPF005:  File I/O Error: Write Open.

 Msg006    GPF006:  File I/O Error: Read Open.

 Msg007    GPF007:  Duplicate or Invalid Name.

 Msg008    GPF008:  Delete this Window and its children?

 Msg009    GPF009:  Delete this Control and its children?

 Msg010    GPF010:  Delete this Menu and its children?

 Msg011    GPF011:  Delete this Action and its children?

 Msg012    GPF012:  Delete this help item and its children?

 Msg013    GPF013:  Delete this 'Associate Data' and its children?

 Msg014    GPF014:  Change this 'Associate Data' and Delete its children?

 Msg015    GPF015:  Invalid Source Name.

 Msg016    GPF016:  Invalid File Name.

 Msg017    GPF017:  Icon/BitMap/Pointer File Not Found.

 Msg018    GPF018:  Please Clean Desktop.

 Msg019    GPF019:  Save the current File?

 Msg020    GPF020:  DataBase Open Error.

 Msg021    GPF021:  File not Found - (Binder) GpfEdit.Bnd

 Msg022    GPF022:  Sql Host variable (Table_Column) is too long.

 Msg023    GPF023:  Delete this Message and its children?

 Msg024    GPF024:  Invalid Thread Name.

 Msg025    GPF025:  Delete this Object and its children?

 Msg026    GPF026:  Delete this Presentation and its children?

 Msg027    GPF027:  Unable to execute GpfRun.Exe

 Msg028    GPF028:  Set this window to 'SYSTEM MODAL'?

 Msg029    GPF029:  This function will be implemented in future releases.

 Msg030    GPF030:  CUA requires mnemonics for each choice in an ActionBar /
           PullDown / Button. Mnemonics are specified by placing a tilde (~)
           before the character which is to be the mnemonic for the choice.
           Bypass CUA requirements?

 Msg031    GPF031:  CUA does not allow mnemonics on the CANCEL push Button.
           Bypass CUA requirements?

 Msg032    GPF032:  The specified mnemonic has already been assigned to another
           control within the same selection field. CUA requires mnemonics to
           be unique within a selection field.  Bypass CUA requirements?

 Msg033    GPF033:  CUA requires that controls begin with a capital letter.
           Bypass CUA requirements?

 Msg034    GPF034:  No DataBase specified in opening screen - Invalid Action.

 Msg035    GPF035:  No Column Selected - Select Column or Set Null Table.

 Msg036    GPF036:  Delete the UserText object and its children?

 Msg037    GPF037:  The 'Max Length' field is invalid.

 Msg038    GPF038:  Before EXIT, save the current File?

 Msg039    GPF039:  Change the 'DATABASE NAME' and Delete all children?

 Msg040    GPF040:  A file with this name already exists in this directory.
           Overwrite?

 Msg041    GPF041:  Not enough memory to complete  task. Terminate one or more
           other jobs. Select OK when ready, or select Cancel to terminate.

 Msg042    GPF042:  The CATALOG contains more than 255 DATABASE names.

 Msg043    GPF043:  The DATABASE contains more than 127 TABLE names.

 Msg044    GPF044:  The DATABASE contains more than 1023 COLUMN names.

 Msg045    GPF045:  Invalid Dll Name OR Dll Load Error.

 Msg046    GPF046:  'Dll User control' is not a Gpf API.

 Msg047    GPF047:  Delete the UserControl object and its children?


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.1. GPF007 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg007

 Msg007    GPF007:  Duplicate or Invalid Name.

 'Name' can contain as many as 20 characters, including underscore characters
 (_), hyphens (-), and periods (.), as well as any letter or number. You cannot
 use spaces in the Names field.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.2. GPF008 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg008

 Msg008    GPF008:  Delete this Window and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.3. GPF009 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg009

 Msg009    GPF009:  Delete this Control and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.4. GPF010 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg010

 Msg010    GPF010:  Delete this Menu and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.5. GPF011 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg011

 Msg011    GPF011:  Delete this Action and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.6. GPF012 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg012

 Msg012    GPF012:  Delete this help item and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.7. GPF013 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg013

 Msg013    GPF013:  Delete this 'Associate Data' and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.8. GPF019 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg019

 Msg019    GPF019:  Save the current File?

 The following will occur based on the response to the file save prompt:

 o If you answer CANCEL to the prompt, Gpf aborts the 'SAVE'.
 o If you answer NO to the prompt, Gpf  discard any changes you may have made
   to the current definition.
 o If you answer YES to the prompt, Gpf will save the current definition to
   disk.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.9. GPF023 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg023

 Msg023    GPF023:  Delete this Message and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.10. GPF025 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg025

 Msg025    GPF025:  Delete this Object and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.11. GPF026 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg026

 Msg026    GPF026:  Delete this Presentation and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.12. GPF036 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg036

 Msg036    GPF036:  Delete the UserText object and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.13. GPF038 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg038

 Msg038    GPF038:  Before EXIT, save the current File?

 The following will occur based on the response to the file save prompt:

 o If you answer CANCEL to the prompt, Gpf aborts the shutdown.
 o If you answer NO to the prompt, Gpf will exit and discard any changes you
   may have made to the current definition.
 o If you answer YES to the prompt, Gpf will save the current definition to
   disk before exiting.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 34.14. GPF047 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Msg047

 Msg047    GPF047:  Delete the UserControl object and its children?

 Press Ok to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will cease
 to exist.

  CAUTION:
 Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

There can be no keys associated with this item. The Window Menu Option simply
lists all existing windows, and is, of course, a dynamic list. The names
appearing in the list are user-defined.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Action key allows the interface designer to define the actions which are to
occur if and when the user activates a particular control, or the control goes
through a phase change (such as initializing or dismissing a window.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

This button exists and is active under two conditions:

 o the control is capable of displaying DB information
 o you have defined the application as being related to a DataBase, in the
   properties screen (see File- Properties.)
 Press this key to define which fields from which tables are to appear in the
 control (listbox, etc), and the order in which they are to appear.

 Note:  The columns may not line up between adjacent lines if a proportional
        font is used. Switch to monospace fonts if alignment is desired, or
        turn ON the Owner Draw option for the list (combo) box.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Press the Cancel key to leave a screen and disregard changes to that screen.

Note:  This will not cause the object being defined to vanish; you must use the
       Destroy button to eliminate an object.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Press Destroy to eliminate an object. This object and all its children will
cease to exist.

CAUTION:
Destruction is FINAL. There is no UNDO function.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

Press EntryHelp if you want to:

 o define a help panel for the current object
 o define an information message for this object, the message to appear at the
   bottom of the parent window (which must have this field enabled.)


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Help key promises further help for the particular screen you're in.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The Ok button should be pressed if and when you are satisfied with all
definitions or edits to this screen. Your changes are registered and you are
returned to the previous level or screen.


ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ <hidden>  ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ

The View/Modify... key is used to look at or edit some defintions or actions. A
list item must be selected prior to pressing this button. Alternatively, you
can achieve the same effect by simply double clicking on the list item.